HP Hewlett Packard Personal Computer 0G02221 User Manual

Service Reference Guide  
HP Compaq dc7800 Business PC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Book  
WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily  
harm or loss of life.  
CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage  
to equipment or loss of information.  
NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
About This Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility  
3 Computer Diagnostic Features  
4 Desktop Management  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation  
7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Connector Pin Assignments  
Appendix B Power Cord Set Requirements  
Appendix C POST Error Messages  
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Installing and Customizing the Software  
NOTE: If the computer was shipped with Windows Vista loaded, you will be prompted to register the  
computer with HP Total Care before installing the operating system. You will see a brief movie followed  
by an online registration form. Fill out the form, click the Begin button, and follow the instructions on the  
screen.  
CAUTION: Do not add optional hardware or third-party devices to the computer until the operating  
system is successfully installed. Doing so may cause errors and prevent the operating system from  
installing properly.  
Installing the Operating System  
The first time you turn on the computer, the operating system is installed automatically. This process  
takes about 5 to 10 minutes, depending on which operating system is being installed. Carefully read  
and follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.  
CAUTION: Once the automatic installation has begun, DO NOT TURN OFF THE COMPUTER UNTIL  
THE PROCESS IS COMPLETE. Turning off the computer during the installation process may damage  
the software that runs the computer or prevent its proper installation.  
NOTE: If the computer shipped with more than one operating system language on the hard drive, the  
installation process could take up to 60 minutes.  
If your computer was not shipped with a Microsoft operating system, some portions of this documentation  
do not apply. Additional information is available in online help after you install the operating system.  
Installing or Upgrading Device Drivers  
When installing optional hardware devices after the operating system installation is complete, you must  
also install the drivers for each of the devices.  
If prompted for the i386 directory, replace the path specification with C:\i386, or use the Browse button  
in the dialog box to locate the i386 folder. This action points the operating system to the appropriate  
drivers.  
Obtain the latest support software , including support software for the operating system from  
http://www.hp.com/support. Select your country and language, select Download drivers and  
software, enter the model number of the computer, and press Enter.  
Installing the Operating System  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
HP Backup and Recovery Manager  
The HP Backup and Recovery Manager is an easy-to-use, versatile application that allows you to back  
up and recover the primary hard drive on the PC. The application works within Windows to create  
backups of Windows, all applications, and all data files. Backups can be scheduled to occur  
automatically at designated intervals, or they can be initiated manually. Important files can be archived  
separately from regular backups.  
HP Backup and Recovery Manager is preinstalled on the hard drive's Recovery Partition and allows you  
to:  
create Recovery Points to back up the entire system incrementally  
back up the entire system in a single archive  
back up individual files and folders  
Recovery Points and file backups can be copied to CD or DVD discs, while all backups can be copied  
to network or secondary hard disks.  
HP highly recommends that you create a Recovery Disc Set immediately before using the computer  
and schedule regular automatic Recovery Point backups.  
To create the Recovery Disc Set:  
1. Click Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and Recovery Manager to open the  
Backup and Recovery Wizard, then click Next.  
2. Select Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended) and click Next.  
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.  
The HP Backup and Recovery Manager provides two basic recovery methods. The first, recovery of  
files and folders, operates in Windows. The second, PC Recovery, requires a reboot to the Recovery  
Partition or from the Recovery Disc Set. To reboot to the Recovery Partition, press F11 at startup when  
you see the message “Press F11 for Emergency Recovery.”  
For more information on using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, refer to the HP Backup and Recovery  
Manager User Guide by selecting Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and Recovery  
Manager Manual.  
NOTE: You can order a Recovery Disc Set from HP by calling the HP support center. Go to the  
following Web site, select your region, and click the Technical support after you buy link under the  
Call HP heading to obtain the support center telephone number for your region.  
2
Chapter 1 Installing and Customizing the Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility  
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities  
Use Computer Setup (F10) Utility to do the following:  
Change factory default settings.  
Set the system date and time.  
Set, view, change, or verify the system configuration, including settings for processor, graphics,  
memory, audio, storage, communications, and input devices.  
Modify the boot order of bootable devices such as hard drives, diskette drives, optical drives, or  
USB flash media devices.  
Enable Quick Boot, which is faster than Full Boot but does not run all of the diagnostic tests run  
during a Full Boot. You can set the system to:  
always Quick Boot (default);  
periodically Full Boot (from every 1 to 30 days); or  
always Full Boot.  
Select Post Messages Enabled or Disabled to change the display status of Power-On Self-Test  
(POST) messages. Post Messages Disabled suppresses most POST messages, such as memory  
count, product name, and other non-error text messages. If a POST error occurs, the error is  
displayed regardless of the mode selected. To manually switch to Post Messages Enabled during  
POST, press any key (except F1 through F12).  
Establish an Ownership Tag, the text of which is displayed each time the system is turned on or  
restarted.  
Enter the Asset Tag or property identification number assigned by the company to this computer.  
Enable the power-on password prompt during system restarts (warm boots) as well as during  
power-on.  
Establish a setup password that controls access to Computer Setup (F10) Utility and the settings  
described in this section.  
Secure integrated I/O functionality, including the serial, USB, or parallel ports, audio, or embedded  
NIC, so that they cannot be used until they are unsecured.  
Enable or disable removable media boot ability.  
Enable or disable legacy diskette write ability (when supported by hardware).  
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Solve system configuration errors detected but not automatically fixed during the Power-On Self-  
Test (POST).  
Replicate the system setup by saving system configuration information on diskette and restoring  
it on one or more computers.  
Execute self-tests on a specified ATA hard drive (when supported by drive).  
Enable or disable DriveLock security (when supported by drive).  
Using Computer Setup (F10) Utilities  
Computer Setup can be accessed only by turning the computer on or restarting the system. To access  
the Computer Setup Utilities menu, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Microsoft Windows, click Start > Shut Down >  
Restart.  
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter  
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again  
press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
3. Select your language from the list and press Enter.  
4. A choice of five headings appears in the Computer Setup Utilities menu: File, Storage, Security,  
Power and Advanced.  
5. Use the arrow (left and right) keys to select the appropriate heading. Use the arrow (up and down)  
keys to select the option you want, then press Enter. To return to the Computer Setup Utilities  
menu, press Esc.  
6. To apply and save changes, select File > Save Changes and Exit.  
If you have made changes that you do not want applied, select Ignore Changes and Exit.  
To reset to factory settings or previously saved default settings (some models), select Apply  
Defaults and Exit. This option will restore the original factory system defaults.  
CAUTION: Do NOT turn the computer power OFF while the BIOS is saving the Computer Setup (F10)  
changes because the CMOS could become corrupted. It is safe to turn off the computer only after exiting  
the F10 Setup screen.  
Table 2-1 Computer Setup (F10) Utility  
Heading  
File  
Table  
Storage  
Security  
Power  
Advanced  
4
Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Computer Setup—File  
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware  
configuration.  
Table 2-2 Computer Setup—File  
Option  
Description  
System Information  
Lists:  
Product name  
SKU number (some models)  
Processor type/speed/stepping  
Cache size (L1/L2) (dual core processors have this listed twice)  
Installed memory size/speed, number of channels (single or dual) (if applicable)  
Integrated MAC address for embedded, enabled NIC (if applicable)  
System BIOS (includes family name and version)  
Chassis serial number  
Asset tracking number  
ME firmware version  
ME management mode  
About  
Displays copyright notice.  
Set Time and Date  
Flash System ROM  
Allows you to set system time and date.  
Allows you to update the system ROM with a BIOS image file located on a USB flash media device  
or CD-ROM.  
Replicated Setup  
Save to Removable Media  
Saves system configuration, including CMOS, to a formatted 1.44-MB diskette, a USB flash media  
device, or a diskette-like device (a storage device set to emulate a diskette drive).  
Restore from Removable Media  
Restores system configuration from a diskette, a USB flash media device, or a diskette-like device.  
Save Current Settings as Default  
Default Setup  
Saves the current system configuration settings as the default.  
Restore Factory Settings as Default  
Restores the factory system configuration settings as the default.  
Applies the currently selected default settings and clears any established passwords.  
Apply Defaults and  
Exit  
Ignore Changes  
and Exit  
Exits Computer Setup without applying or saving any changes.  
Save Changes and Exit Saves changes to system configuration or default settings and exits Computer Setup.  
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Computer Setup—Storage  
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware  
configuration.  
Table 2-3 Computer Setup—Storage  
Option  
Description  
Device Configuration  
Lists all installed BIOS-controlled storage devices.  
When a device is selected, detailed information and options are displayed. The following options  
may be presented.  
Diskette Type (Legacy Diskettes only)  
Identifies the highest capacity media type accepted by the diskette drive. Options are 3.5" 1.44 MB  
and 5.25" 1.2 MB.  
Drive Emulation  
Allows you to select a drive emulation type for a certain storage device. (For example, a Zip drive  
can be made bootable by selecting diskette emulation.)  
Emulation Type  
ATAPI Zip drive:  
None (treated as Other).  
Diskette (treated as diskette drive).  
Legacy Diskette: No emulation options available.  
CD-ROM: No emulation options available.  
ATAPI LS-120:  
None (treated as Other).  
Diskette (treated as diskette drive).  
Hard Disk  
None (prevents BIOS data accesses and disables it as a boot device).  
Hard Disk (treated as hard disk).  
Multisector Transfers (ATA disks only)  
Specifies how many sectors are transferred per multi-sector PIO operation. Options (subject to  
device capabilities) are Disabled, 8, and 16.  
Translation Mode (ATA disks only)  
Lets you select the translation mode to be used for the device. This enables the BIOS to access  
disks partitioned and formatted on other systems and may be necessary for users of older versions  
of UNIX (e.g., SCO UNIX version 3.2). Options are Automatic, Bit-Shift, LBA Assisted, User, and  
None.  
CAUTION: Ordinarily, the translation mode selected automatically by the BIOS should not be  
changed. If the selected translation mode is not compatible with the translation mode that was active  
when the disk was partitioned and formatted, the data on the disk will be inaccessible.  
Translation Parameters (ATA disks only)  
NOTE: This feature appears only when User translation mode is selected.  
6
Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Table 2-3 Computer Setup—Storage (continued)  
Allows you to specify the parameters (logical cylinders, heads, and sectors per track) used by the  
BIOS to translate disk I/O requests (from the operating system or an application) into terms the hard  
drive can accept. Logical cylinders may not exceed 1024. The number of heads may not exceed  
256. The number of sectors per track may not exceed 63. These fields are only visible and  
changeable when the drive translation mode is set to User.  
SATA Default Values  
Allows you to specify the default values for the Multisector Transfers, Transfer Mode, and Translation  
Mode for ATA devices.  
Storage Options  
Removable Media Boot  
Enables/disables ability to boot the system from removable media.  
Legacy Diskette Write  
Enables/disables ability to write data to legacy diskettes.  
NOTE: After saving changes to Removable Media Write, the computer will restart. Turn the  
computer off, then on, manually.  
SATA Emulation  
Allows you to choose how the SATA controller and devices are accessed by the operating system.  
There are two supported options: IDE and RAID.  
IDE is the default option. Use this option for "normal" (non-RAID) configurations.  
Select the RAID option to enable DOS and boot accesses to RAID volumes. Use this option for RAID  
configurations under Windows 2000, XP, or Vista with the appropriate RAID device driver.  
NOTE: The RAID device driver must be installed prior to attempting to boot from a RAID volume.  
If you attempt to boot from a RAID volume without the required device driver installed, the system  
will crash (blue screen). Also, do not select the RAID option while the DriveLock feature is enabled  
on any attached hard drives. Doing so will cause the DriveLocked drives to remain locked and  
inaccessible during subsequent reboots until another SATA Emulation mode is selected.  
NOTE: SATA Emulation is not available on USDT systems.  
DPS Self-Test  
Boot Order  
Allows you to execute self-tests on ATA hard drives capable of performing the Drive Protection  
System (DPS) self-tests.  
NOTE: This selection will only appear when at least one drive capable of performing the DPS self-  
tests is attached to the system.  
Allows you to:  
Specify the order in which attached devices (such as a USB flash media device, diskette drive,  
hard drive, optical drive, or network interface card) are checked for a bootable operating system  
image. Each device on the list may be individually excluded from or included for consideration  
as a bootable operating system source.  
Specify the order of attached hard drives. The first hard drive in the order will have priority in  
the boot sequence and will be recognized as drive C (if any devices are attached).  
NOTE: MS-DOS drive lettering assignments may not apply after a non-MS-DOS operating system  
has started.  
Shortcut to Temporarily Override Boot Order  
To boot one time from a device other than the default device specified in Boot Order, restart the  
computer and press F9 when the monitor light turns green. After POST is completed, a list of bootable  
devices is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select the preferred bootable device and press Enter.  
The computer then boots from the selected non-default device for this one time.  
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Computer Setup—Security  
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware  
configuration.  
Table 2-4 Computer Setup—Security  
Option  
Description  
Setup Password  
Allows you to set and enable setup (administrator) password.  
NOTE: If the setup password is set, it is required to change Computer Setup options, flash the  
ROM, and make changes to certain plug and play settings under Windows.  
See the Troubleshooting Guide for more information.  
Power-On Password  
Allows you to set and enable power-on password. The power-on password prompt appears after a  
power cycle. If the user does not enter the correct power-on password, the unit will not boot.  
NOTE: This password does not appear on warm boots , such as Ctrl+Alt+Delete or Restart from  
Windows, unless enabled in Password Options, below.  
See the Troubleshooting Guide for more information.  
Password Options  
Allows you to:  
(This selection appears  
only if a power-on  
password or setup  
password is set.)  
Lock legacy resources (appears if a setup password is set)  
Enable/disable network server mode (appears if a power-on password is set)  
Specify whether the password is required for warm boot (Ctrl+Alt+Delete) (appears if a power-  
on password is set)  
Enable/Disable Setup Browse Mode (appears if a setup password is set) (allows viewing, but  
not changing, the F10 Setup Options without entering setup password)  
See the Desktop Management Guide for more information.  
Smart Cover (some  
Allows you to:  
models)  
Lock/unlock the Cover Lock.  
Set the Cover Removal Sensor to Disable/Notify User/Setup Password.  
NOTE: Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that the cover has been  
removed. Setup Password requires that the setup password be entered to boot the computer if the  
sensor detects that the cover has been removed.  
This feature is supported on some models only. See the Desktop Management Guide for more  
information.  
Device Security  
Allows you to set Device Available/Device Hidden for  
Serial ports  
Parallel port  
All USB ports  
Front USB ports  
System audio  
Network controllers (some models)  
Legacy diskette  
8
Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Table 2-4 Computer Setup—Security (continued)  
Embedded security device (some models)  
SATA0  
SATA1 (some models)  
SATA4 (some models)  
SATA5 (some models)  
Network Service Boot Enables/disables the computer’s ability to boot from an operating system installed on a network  
server. (Feature available on NIC models only; the network controller must be either a PCI expansion  
card or embedded on the system board.)  
System IDs  
Allows you to set:  
Asset tag (18-byte identifier) and ownership tag (80-byte identifier displayed during POST).  
See the Desktop Management Guide for more information.  
Chassis serial number or Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) number. The UUID can only be  
updated if the current chassis serial number is invalid. (These ID numbers are normally set in  
the factory and are used to uniquely identify the system.)  
Keyboard locale setting (for example, English or German) for System ID entry.  
DriveLock Security  
Allows you to assign or modify a master or user password for hard drives. When this feature is  
enabled, the user is prompted to provide one of the DriveLock passwords during POST. If neither  
is successfully entered, the hard drive will remain inaccessible until one of the passwords is  
successfully provided during a subsequent cold-boot sequence.  
NOTE: This selection will only appear when at least one drive that supports the DriveLock feature  
is attached to the system.  
See the Desktop Management Guide for more information.  
System Security (some Data Execution Prevention (some models) (enable/disable) Helps prevent operating system security  
models: these options  
are hardware  
breaches.  
Virtualization Technology (some models) (enable/disable) Controls the virtualization features of the  
processor. Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and then back on.  
dependent)  
Virtualization Technology Directed I/O (some models) (enable/disable) Controls virtualization DMA  
remapping features of the chipset. Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and then  
back on.  
Trusted Execution Technology (some models) (enable/disable) Controls the underlying processor  
and chipset features needed to support a virtual appliance. Changing this setting requires turning  
the computer off and then back on. To enable this feature you must enable the following features:  
Embedded Security Device Support  
Virtualization Technology  
Virtualization Technology Directed I/O  
Embedded Security Device Support (some models) (enable/disable) Permits activation and  
deactivation of the Embedded Security Device. Changing this setting requires turning the computer  
off and then back on.  
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 2-4 Computer Setup—Security (continued)  
NOTE: To configure the Embedded Security Device, a Setup password must be set.  
Reset to Factory Settings (some models) (Do not reset/Reset) Resetting to factory defaults will  
erase all security keys. Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and then back  
on.  
CAUTION: The embedded security device is a critical component of many security schemes.  
Erasing the security keys will prevent access to data protected by the Embedded Security  
Device. Choosing Reset to Factory Settings may result in significant data loss.  
Power-on authentication support (some models) (enable/disable) Controls the power-on  
password authentication scheme that utilizes the Embedded Security Device. Changing this  
setting requires turning the computer off and then back on.  
Reset authentication credentials (some models) (Do not reset/Reset) Selecting Reset disables  
the power-on authentication support and clears the authentication information from the  
Embedded Security Device. Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and then  
back on  
OS management of Embedded Security Device (some models) (enable/disable) This option allows  
the user to limit operating system control of the Embedded Security Device. Changing this setting  
requires turning the computer off and then back on. This option allows the user to limit OS control  
of the Embedded Security Device.  
Reset of Embedded Security Device through OS (some models) (enable/disable) This option  
allows the user to limit the operating system ability to request a Reset to Factory Settings of  
the Embedded Security Device. Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and  
then back on.  
NOTE: To enable this option, a Setup password must be set.  
Virtual Appliance (enable/disable) Controls Verified Launch of a hypervisor.  
NOTE: Virtual Appliance options are only available when Trusted Execution Technology is enabled  
and VA 3.0 is installed.  
NOTE: Computer Setup's "Apply Defaults and Exit" option is prohibited while a virtual appliance  
is installed.  
Virtual Appliance Configuration Interface (unlock/lock) Controls software access to the VA 3.0  
configuration interfaces.  
Smart Card BIOS Password Support (some models) (enable/disable) Allows the user to enable/  
disable the Smart Card to be used in place of the Setup and Power-On Passwords. This setting  
requires additional initialization within HP ProtectTools® before this option will take effect.  
Setup Security Level  
Provides a method to allow end-users limited access to change specified setup options, without  
having to know the Setup Password.  
This feature allows the administrator the flexibility to protect changes to essential setup options,  
while allowing the user to view system settings and configure nonessential options. The administrator  
specifies access rights to individual setup options on a case-by-case basis via the Setup Security  
Level menu. By default, all setup options are assigned Setup Password, indicating the user must  
enter the correct Setup Password during POST to make changes to any of the options. The  
administrator may set individual items to None, indicating the user can make changes to the specified  
options when setup has been accessed with invalid passwords. The choice, None, is replaced by  
Power-On Password if a Power-On Password is enabled.  
NOTE: Setup Browse Mode must be set to Enable in order for the user to enter Setup without  
knowing the setup password.  
10 Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Computer Setup—Power  
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware  
configuration.  
Table 2-5 Computer Setup—Power  
Option  
Description  
OS Power  
Runtime Power Management— Enable/Disable. Allows certain operating systems to reduce  
Management  
processor voltage and frequency when the current software load does not require the full  
capabilities of the processor.  
Idle Power Savings—Extended/Normal. Allows certain operating systems to decrease the  
processors power consumption when the processor is idle.  
ACPI S3 Hard Disk Reset—Enabling this causes the BIOS to ensure hard disks are ready to  
accept commands after resuming from S3 before returning control to the operating system.  
ACPI S3 PS2 Mouse Wakeup—Enables or disables waking from S3 due to PS2 mouse activity.  
USB Wake on Device Insertion (some models)—Allows system to wake from Standby on USB  
device insertion.  
Unique Sleep State Blink Rates—Enable/Disable. This feature is designed to provide a visual  
indication of what sleep state the system is in. Each sleep state has a unique blink pattern.  
S0 = Solid green LED.  
S3 = 3 blinks at 1Hz (50% duty cycle) followed by a pause of 2 seconds (green LED) —  
repeated cycles of 3 blinks and a pause.  
S4 = 4 blinks at 1Hz (50% duty cycle) followed by a pause of 2 seconds (green LED) —  
repeated cycles of 4 blinks and a pause.  
S5 = LED is off.  
NOTE: If this feature is disabled, S4 and S5 both have the LED off. S1 (no longer supported)  
and S3 use 1 blink per second.  
Hardware Power  
Management  
SATA power management enables or disables SATA bus and/or device power management.  
Thermal  
Fan idle mode—This bar graph controls the minimum permitted fan speed.  
NOTE: This setting only changes the minimum fan speed. The fans are still automatically  
controlled.  
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Computer Setup—Advanced  
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware  
configuration.  
Table 2-6 Computer Setup—Advanced (for advanced users)  
Option  
Heading  
Power-On Options  
Allows you to set:  
POST mode (QuickBoot, FullBoot, or FullBoot every 1–30 days).  
POST messages (enable/disable).  
MEBx Setup Prompt (hidden/displayed). Enabling this feature displays the text CTRL+P =  
MEBx during POST. Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed. However,  
pressing Ctrl+P still accesses the ME BIOS Extension Setup Utility, which is used to configure  
manageability settings.  
F9 prompt (hidden/displayed). Enabling this feature will display the text F9 = Boot Menu during  
POST. Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed. However, pressing F9 will  
still access the Shortcut Boot [Order] Menu screen. See Storage > Boot Order for more  
information.  
F10 prompt (hidden/displayed). Enabling this feature will display the text F10 = Setup during  
POST. Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed. However, pressing F10  
will still access the Setup screen.  
F11 prompt (hidden/displayed). Setting this feature to displayed will display the text F11 =  
Recovery during POST. Hiding the feature prevents the text from being displayed. However,  
pressing F11 will still attempt to boot to the HP Backup and Recovery partition. See Factory  
Recovery Boot Support for more information.  
F12 prompt (hidden/displayed). Enabling this feature will display the text F12 = Network during  
POST. Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed. However, pressing F12  
will still force the system to attempt booting from the network.  
Factory Recovery Boot Support (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will cause an additional  
prompt, F11 = Recovery, to be displayed during POST on systems with HP Backup and  
Recovery software installed and configured with a recovery partition on the boot hard drive.  
Pressing F11 causes the system to boot to the recovery partition and launch HP Backup and  
Recovery. The F11 = Recovery prompt can be hidden with the F11 prompt (hidden/displayed)  
option (see above).  
Option ROM prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will cause the system to display a  
message before loading option ROMs. (This feature is supported on some models only.)  
WOL After Power Loss (enable/disable). Enabling this option will cause the system to power-  
up momentarily after a power loss in order to enable the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature.  
Remote wakeup boot source (remote server/local hard drive).  
After Power Loss (off/on/previous state): Setting this option to:  
Off—causes the computer to remain powered off when power is restored.  
On—causes the computer to power on automatically as soon as power is restored.  
On—allows you to power on the computer using a rack power strip switch, if the computer  
is connected to an electric power strip.  
Previous state—causes the computer to power on automatically as soon as power is  
restored, if it was on when power was lost.  
12 Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Table 2-6 Computer Setup—Advanced (for advanced users) (continued)  
NOTE: If you turn off power to the computer using the switch on a power strip, you will not be able  
to use the suspend/sleep feature or the Remote Management features.  
POST Delay (None, 5, 10 15, or 20 seconds). Enabling this feature will add a user-specified  
delay to the POST process. This delay is sometimes needed for hard disks on some PCI cards  
that spin up very slowly, so slowly that they are not ready to boot by the time POST is finished.  
The POST delay also gives you more time to select F10 to enter Computer (F10) Setup.  
Limit CPUID Maximum Value to 3. Restricts the number of CPUID functions reported by the  
microprocessor. Enable this feature if booting to Windows NT.  
Execute Memory Test  
Restarts the computer and executes the POST memory test.  
(some models)  
BIOS Power-On  
Allows you to set the computer to turn on automatically at a time you specify.  
Onboard Devices  
Allows you to set resources for or disable onboard system devices (diskette controller, serial port,  
or parallel port).  
PCI Devices  
Lists currently installed PCI devices and their IRQ settings.  
Allows you to reconfigure IRQ settings for these devices or to disable them entirely. These  
settings have no effect under an ACPI-based operating system.  
PCI VGA Configuration Displayed only if there are multiple PCI video adapters in the system. Allows you to specify which  
VGA controller will be the “boot” or primary VGA controller.  
NOTE: In order to see this entry, you must enable Integrated Video (Advanced > Device  
Options) and Save Changes and Exit.  
Bus Options  
On some models, allows you to enable or disable:  
PCI SERR# Generation.  
PCI VGA palette snooping, which sets the VGA palette snooping bit in PCI configuration space;  
only needed when more than one graphics controller is installed.  
Device Options  
Allows you to set:  
Printer mode (Bi-Directional, EPP + ECP, Output Only).  
Num Lock state at power-on (off/on).  
S5 Wake on LAN (enable/disable).  
To disable Wake on LAN during the off state (S5), use the arrow (left and right) keys to  
select the Advanced > Device Options menu and set the S5 Wake on LAN feature to  
Disable. This obtains the lowest power consumption available on the computer during  
S5. It does not affect the ability of the computer to Wake on LAN from suspend or  
hibernation, but will prevent it from waking from S5 via the network. It does not affect  
operation of the network connection while the computer is on.  
If a network connection is not required, completely disable the network controller (NIC) by  
using the arrow (left and right) keys to select the Security > Device Security menu. Set  
the Network Controller option to Device Hidden. This prevents the network controller  
from being used by the operating system and reduces the power used by the computer  
in S5.  
Processor cache (enable/disable).  
Integrated Video (enable/disable). Allows you to use integrated video and PCI Up Solution  
video at the same time (available on some models only).  
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 2-6 Computer Setup—Advanced (for advanced users) (continued)  
NOTE: After Integrated Video is enabled and changes saved, a new menu item appears  
under Advanced to allow you to select the primary VGA controller video device.  
Inserting a PCI Express video card automatically disables Integrated Video. When PCI Express  
video is on, Integrated Video must remain disabled.  
Multi-Processor (enable/disable). This option may be used to disable multi-processor support  
under the OS.  
Internal speaker (some models) (enable/disable)  
Monitor Tracking (enable/disable). Allows BIOS to save monitor asset information.  
NIC PXE Option ROM Download (enable/disable). The BIOS contains an embedded NIC option  
ROM to allow the unit to boot through the network to a PXE server. This is typically used to  
download a corporate image to a hard drive. The NIC option ROM takes up memory space  
below 1MB commonly referred to as DOS Compatibility Hole (DCH) space. This space is  
limited. This F10 option will allow users to disable the downloading of this embedded NIC option  
ROM thus giving more DCH space for additional PCI cards which may need option ROM space.  
The default will be to have the NIC option-ROM-enabled.  
AMT Options  
Allows you to set:  
SOL Character Echo (enable/disable). Some remote consoles print remotely-entered  
characters which can cause the characters to appear twice (once when entered remotely and  
once when echoed back from local client video). This option allows the administrator to have  
the SOL terminal emulator suppress echoing remotely-entered characters to the local video  
display.  
SOL Terminal Emulation Mode (enable/disable). Selects between VT100 and ANSI SOL  
terminal emulation. SOL terminal emulation mode is only activated during remote AMT  
redirection operations. The emulation options allow administrators to select which mode works  
best with their console.  
SOL Local Keyboard (enable/disable). Disable or enable client keyboard during SOL sessions.  
Some remote remediation may involve having the local client boot a remote image provided by  
an administrator. This option determines if the BIOS will keep the local keyboard enabled or  
disabled for possible local client interaction. If the local keyboard is disabled, all keyboard input  
is only accepted from the remote source.  
AMT Force Unprovision (enable/disable). Forces AMT configuration back to factory defaults.  
This feature allows AMT to be unprovisioned locally without having to enter the MEBx utility or  
clear CMOS. Only the AMT configuration options are returned to factory defaults. Any MEBx  
changes to the ME configuration or non-AMT options are unchanged.  
Recovering the Configuration Settings  
This method of recovery requires that you first perform the Save to Removable Media command with  
the Computer Setup (F10) Utility before Restore is needed. (See Save to Removable Media  
on page 5 in the Computer Setup—File table.)  
NOTE: It is recommended that you save any modified computer configuration settings to a diskette,  
a USB flash media device, or a diskette-like device (a storage device set to emulate a diskette drive)  
and save the diskette or device for possible future use.  
To restore the configuration, insert the diskette, USB flash media device, or other storage media  
emulating a diskette with the saved configuration and perform the Restore from Removable Media  
command with the Computer Setup (F10) Utility. (See Restore from Removable Media on page 5 in the  
Computer Setup—File table.)  
14 Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Computer Diagnostic Features  
HP Insight Diagnostics  
NOTE: HP Insight Diagnostics is included on CD with some computer models only.  
The HP Insight Diagnostics utility allows you to view information about the hardware configuration of  
the computer and perform hardware diagnostic tests on the subsystems of the computer. The utility  
simplifies the process of effectively identifying, diagnosing, and isolating hardware issues.  
The Survey tab is displayed when you invoke HP Insight Diagnostics. This tab shows the current  
configuration of the computer. From the Survey tab, there is access to several categories of information  
about the computer. Other tabs provide additional information, including diagnostic test options and test  
results. The information in each screen of the utility can be saved as an html file and stored on a diskette  
or USB HP Drive Key.  
Use HP Insight Diagnostics to determine if all the devices installed on the computer are recognized by  
the system and functioning properly. Running tests is optional but recommended after installing or  
connecting a new device.  
You should run tests, save the test results, and print them so that you have printed reports available  
before placing a call to the Customer Support Center.  
NOTE: Third party devices may not be detected by HP Insight Diagnostics.  
Accessing HP Insight Diagnostics  
To access HP Insight Diagnostics, you must create a Recovery Disc Set then boot to the CD containing  
the utility. It can also be downloaded from http://www.hp.com. See Downloading the Latest Version of  
HP Insight Diagnostics on page 19 for more information.  
NOTE: HP Insight Diagnostics is included as part of the Recovery Disk Set with some computer  
models only.  
If you have already created a Recovery Disc Set, begin the following procedure at step 4.  
1. Click Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and Recovery Manager to open the  
Backup and Recovery Wizard, then click Next.  
2. Select Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended) and click Next.  
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard to create a Recovery Disc Set.  
4. Use Windows Explorer to search the Recovery Disc Set for the CD with the compaq\hpdiags  
directory.  
5. While the computer is on, insert the CD into an optical drive on the computer.  
HP Insight Diagnostics 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Shut down the operating system and turn off the computer.  
7. Turn on the computer. The system will boot to the CD.  
NOTE: If the system does not boot to the CD in the optical drive, you may need to change the  
boot order in the Computer Setup (F10) utility so that the system attempts to boot to the optical  
drive before booting to the hard drive. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide for more  
information.  
8. Select the appropriate language and click Continue.  
NOTE: It is recommended that you accept the assigned default keyboard for your language  
unless you want to test your specific keyboard.  
9. In the End User License Agreement page, click Agree if you agree with the terms. The HP Insight  
Diagnostics utility launches with the Survey tab displayed.  
Survey Tab  
The Survey tab displays important system configuration information.  
In the View level field, you can select the Summary view to see limited configuration data or select  
the Advanced view to see all the data in the selected category.  
In the Category field, you can select the following categories of information to display:  
All—Gives a listing of all categories of information about the computer.  
Overview—Gives you a listing of general information about the computer.  
Architecture—Provides system BIOS and PCI device information.  
Asset Control—Shows product name, asset tag, system serial number, and processor information.  
Communication—Shows information about the computer parallel (LPT) and serial (COM) port settings,  
plus USB and network controller information.  
Graphics—Shows information about the graphics controller of the computer.  
Input Devices—Shows information about the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices connected to  
the computer.  
Memory—Shows information about all memory in the computer. This includes memory slots on the  
system board and any memory modules installed.  
Miscellaneous—Shows HP Insight Diagnostics version information, computer configuration memory  
(CMOS) information, system board data, and system management BIOS data.  
Storage—Shows information about storage media connected to the computer. This list includes all fixed  
disks, diskette drives, and optical drives.  
System—Shows information about the computer model, processor, chassis, and BIOS, plus internal  
speaker and PCI bus information.  
16 Chapter 3 Computer Diagnostic Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Test Tab  
The Test tab allows you to choose various parts of the system to test. You can also choose the type of  
test and testing mode.  
There are three types of tests to choose from:  
Quick Test—Provides a predetermined script where a sample of each hardware component is  
exercised and requires no user intervention in either Unattended or Interactive mode.  
Complete Test—Provides a predetermined script where each hardware component is fully tested.  
There are more tests available in the Interactive mode, but these require user intervention.  
Custom Test—Provides the most flexibility in controlling the testing of a system. The Custom Test  
mode allows you to specifically select which devices, tests, and test parameters are run.  
For each test type, there are two test modes to choose from:  
Interactive Mode—Provides maximum control over the testing process. The diagnostic software  
will prompt you for input during tests that require your interaction. You may also determine whether  
the test passed or failed.  
Unattended Mode—Does not display prompts and requires no interaction. If errors are found, they  
are displayed when testing is complete.  
To begin testing:  
1. Select the Test tab.  
2. Select the tab for the type of test you want to run: Quick, Complete, or Custom.  
3. Select the Test Mode: Interactive or Unattended.  
4. Choose how you want the test to be executed, either Number of Loops or Total Test Time. When  
choosing to run the test over a specified number of loops, enter the number of loops to perform. If  
you desire to have the diagnostic test for a specified time period, enter the amount of time in  
minutes.  
5. If performing a Quick Test or Complete Test, select the device to be tested from the drop-down  
list. If performing a Custom Test, Click the Expand button and select the devices to be tested or  
click the Check All button to select all devices.  
6. Click the Begin Testing button at the bottom right corner of the screen to start the test. The Status  
tab, which allows you to monitor the progress of the test, is automatically displayed during the  
testing process. When the test is complete, the Status tab shows whether the device passed or  
failed.  
7. If errors are found, go to the Log tab and click the Error Log to display more detailed information  
and recommended actions.  
Status Tab  
The Status tab displays the status of the selected tests. The type of test executed (Quick, Complete,  
or Custom) is also displayed. The main progress bar displays the percent complete of the current set  
of tests. While testing is in progress, a Cancel Testing button is displayed for use if you want to cancel  
the test.  
HP Insight Diagnostics 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
After testing has completed, the Cancel Testing button is replaced with a Retest button. The Retest  
button will retest the last set of tests executed. This enables you to re-run the set of tests without having  
to re-enter the data in the Test tab.  
The Status tab also shows:  
The devices being tested  
The test status (running, passed, or failed) of each device being tested  
The overall test progress of all devices being tested  
The test progress for each device being tested  
The elapsed test times for each device being tested  
Log Tab  
The Log tab contains a Test Log tab and an Error Log tab.  
The Test Log displays all tests that have been executed, the number of times of execution, the number  
of times failed, and the time it took to complete each test. The Clear Test Log button will clear the  
contents of the Test Log.  
The Error Log displays the tests for devices that have failed during the diagnostic testing and includes  
the following columns of information.  
The Device section displays the device tested.  
The Test section displays the type of test run.  
The Description section describes the error that the diagnostic test found.  
The Recommended Repair will give a recommended action that should be performed to resolve  
the failed hardware.  
The Failed Count is the number of times the device has failed a test.  
The Error Code provides a numerical code for the failure. The error codes are defined in the Help  
tab.  
The Clear Error Log button will clear the contents of the Error Log.  
Help Tab  
On the Help tab contains an HP Insight Diagnostics tab, an Error Codes tab, and a Test  
Components tab.  
The HP Insight Diagnostics tab contains help topics and includes search and index features.  
The Error Codes tab provides a description of each numerical error code that may appear in the Error  
Log tab located on the Log tab. Each code has a corresponding error Message and a Recommended  
Repair action that should help solve the problem. To find an error code description quickly, enter the  
code in the box at the top of the tab and click the Find Error Codes button.  
The Test Components tab displays low-level information on tests that are run.  
18 Chapter 3 Computer Diagnostic Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Saving and Printing Information in HP Insight Diagnostics  
You can save the information displayed in the HP Insight Diagnostics Survey and Log tabs to a diskette  
or a USB 2.0 HP Drive Key (64MB or higher). You can not save to the hard drive. The system will  
automatically create an html file that has the same appearance as the information displayed on the  
screen.  
1. Insert a diskette or USB 2.0 HP Drive Key (capacity must be 64MB or higher). USB 1.0 Drive Keys  
are not supported.  
2. Click Save in the bottom right corner of the screen.  
3. Select Save to the floppy or Save to USB key.  
4. Enter a file name in the File Name box and click the Save button. An html file will be saved to the  
inserted diskette or USB HP Drive Key.  
NOTE: Do not remove the diskette or USB key until you see a message indicating that the html  
file has been written to the media.  
5. Print the information from the storage device used to save it.  
NOTE: To exit HP Insight Diagnostics, click Exit Diagnostics button in the bottom left corner of the  
screen then remove the CD from the optical drive.  
Downloading the Latest Version of HP Insight Diagnostics  
1. Go to http://www.hp.com.  
2. Click the Software & Driver Downloads link.  
3. Enter your product number (for example, dc7800) in the text box and press the Enter key.  
4. Select your specific computer model.  
5. Select your OS.  
6. Click the Diagnostic link.  
7. Click HP Insight Diagnostics Offline Edition.  
8. Select a language and click Download.  
NOTE: The download includes instructions on how to create the bootable CD.  
Protecting the Software  
To protect software from loss or damage, you should keep a backup copy of all system software,  
applications, and related files stored on the hard drive. See the operating system or backup utility  
documentation for instructions on making backup copies of data files.  
Protecting the Software 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
HP Backup and Recovery Manager  
The HP Backup and Recovery Manager is an easy-to-use, versatile application that allows you to back  
up and recover the primary hard drive on the PC. The application works within Windows to create  
backups of Windows, all applications, and all data files. Backups can be scheduled to occur  
automatically at designated intervals, or they can be initiated manually. Important files can be archived  
separately from regular backups.  
HP Backup and Recovery Manager is preinstalled on the hard drive's Recovery Partition and allows you  
to:  
Create Recovery Points to back up the entire system incrementally  
Back up the entire system in a single archive  
Back up individual files and folders  
Recovery Points and file backups can be copied to CD or DVD discs, while all backups can be copied  
to network or secondary hard disks.  
HP highly recommends that you create a Recovery Disc Set immediately before using the computer  
and schedule regular automatic Recovery Point backups.  
To create the Recovery Disc Set:  
1. Click Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and Recovery Manager to open the  
Backup and Recovery Wizard, then click Next.  
2. Select Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended) and click Next.  
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.  
The HP Backup and Recovery Manager provides two basic recovery methods. The first, recovery of  
files and folders, operates in Windows. The second, PC Recovery, requires a reboot to the Recovery  
Partition or from the Recovery Disc Set. To reboot to the Recovery Partition, press F11 at startup when  
you see the message “Press F11 for Emergency Recovery.”  
For more information on using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, refer to the HP Backup and Recovery  
Manager User Guide by selecting Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and Recovery  
Manager Manual.  
NOTE: You can order a Recovery Disc Set from HP by calling the HP support center. Go to the  
following Web site, select your region, and click the Technical support after you buy link under the  
Call HP heading to obtain the support center telephone number for your region.  
20 Chapter 3 Computer Diagnostic Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Desktop Management  
HP Client Management Solutions provides standards-based solutions for managing and controlling  
desktops, workstations, and notebook PCs in a networked environment. HP pioneered desktop  
manageability in 1995 with the introduction of the industry’s first fully manageable desktop personal  
computers. HP is a patent holder of manageability technology. Since then, HP has led an industry-wide  
effort to develop the standards and infrastructure required to effectively deploy, configure, and manage  
desktops, workstations, and notebook PCs. HP develops its own management software and works  
closely with leading management software solution providers in the industry to ensure compatibility  
between HP Client Management Solutions and these products. HP Client Management Solutions are  
an important aspect of our broad commitment to providing you with solutions that assist you in lowering  
the total cost of owning and maintaining the PCs throughout their lifecycle.  
The key capabilities and features of desktop management are:  
Initial configuration and deployment  
Remote system installation  
Software updating and management  
ROM flash  
Hardware option configuration  
Asset tracking and security  
Fault notification and recovery  
NOTE: Support for specific features described in this guide may vary by model or software version.  
Initial Configuration and Deployment  
The computer comes with a preinstalled system software image. After a brief software “unbundling”  
process, the computer is ready to use.  
Initial Configuration and Deployment 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
You may prefer to replace the preinstalled software image with a customized set of system and  
application software. There are several methods for deploying a customized software image. They  
include:  
Installing additional software applications after unbundling the preinstalled software image.  
Using software deployment tools, such as HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager (not  
currently available for Windows Vista), HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solution  
(based on Radia technology) (not currently available for Windows Vista), or Altiris Deployment  
Solution, to replace the preinstalled software with a customized software image.  
Using a disk cloning process to copy the contents from one hard drive to another.  
The best deployment method depends on your information technology environment and processes. The  
PC Deployment section of the HP Lifecycle Service Web site (http://h20219.www2.hp.com/services/  
cache/80906-0-0-225-121.html) provides information to help you select the best deployment method.  
The Restore Plus! CD, ROM-based setup, and ACPI hardware provide further assistance with recovery  
of system software, configuration management and troubleshooting, and power management.  
NOTE: See HP Backup and Recovery Manager on page 2 for information on creating the Restore  
Plus! CD.  
HP OpenView Agent  
NOTE: HP OpenView Agent is not currently available for Windows Vista.  
The management agent used by both HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager and HP OpenView  
PC Configuration Management Solution is pre-loaded on the computer. When installed, it enables  
communication with the HP OpenView management console.  
To install the HP OpenView Agent:  
1. Click Start.  
2. Click All Programs.  
3. Click HP Manageability.  
4. Click Radia Management Agent Readme.  
5. Review and follow the instructions contained in the Readme file to install the HP OpenView Agent.  
The HP OpenView Agent is a key infrastructure component for enabling all of the HP OpenView PC  
Configuration Management Solution. To learn about the other infrastructure components necessary for  
implementing the HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solution, please visit  
Altiris Deployment Solution Agent  
This program is pre-loaded on the computer. When installed, it enables communication with the  
administrator Deployment Solution console.  
To install Altiris Deployment Solution Agent:  
1. Click Start.  
2. Click All Programs.  
22 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3. For Windows Vista, click Install Altiris DAgent.  
For Windows XP, click Install Altiris AClient.  
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to set up and configure the Altiris client.  
The Altiris Deployment Solution Agent is a key infrastructure component for enabling the HP Client  
Foundation Suite and the Client Premium Suite. To learn about the other infrastructure components  
necessary for implementing the HP Client Foundation Suite and Client Premium Suite, please visit  
Verdiem Surveyor Client Side Installation  
1. If the software is pre-installed, select the icon on the Start menu.  
-or-  
Download and run a softpaq that contains the software.  
2. From the Welcome screen, click Next.  
3. Click Change to select where you want to install the client and client data, and then click Next.  
4. Type in the server name, port, an a preferred group (optional), and then click Next.  
NOTE: This is the only location you can enter server information. The only way to change this  
information after installation is to uninstall/reinstall or change a registry key.  
NOTE: The make the Next button active, click out of the Surveyor Server Name field.  
5. Click Install to install the software.  
6. Click Finish after the installation is complete.  
Remote System Installation  
Remote System Installation allows you to start and set up the system using the software and  
configuration information located on a network server by initiating the Preboot Execution Environment  
(PXE). The Remote System Installation feature is usually used as a system setup and configuration  
tool, and can be used for the following tasks:  
Formatting a hard drive  
Deploying a software image on one or more new PCs  
Remotely updating the system BIOS in flash ROM (Remote ROM Flash on page 32)  
Configuring the system BIOS settings  
To initiate Remote System Installation, press F12 when the F12 = Network Service Boot message  
appears in the lower-right corner of the HP logo screen when the computer is booting up. Follow the  
instructions on the screen to continue the process. The default boot order is a BIOS configuration setting  
that can be changed to always attempt to PXE boot.  
Remote System Installation 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Software Updating and Management  
HP provides several tools for managing and updating software on desktops, workstations, and  
notebooks:  
HP Client Management Interface  
HP System Software Manager  
HP Client Manager  
HP ProtectTools Security Manager  
HP Client Premium Suite  
HP Client Foundation Suite  
HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager (not currently available for Windows Vista)  
HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solution (not currently available for Windows Vista)  
HP Client Catalog for SMS  
HP Backup and Recovery Manager  
Intel vPro-branded PCs with Active Management Technology  
HP Proactive Change Notification  
HP Subscriber's Choice  
HP Client Management Interface  
Regardless of the system management tools your IT department uses, managing both your hardware  
and software assets is important to keeping your IT costs low and your business agile. The IT  
administrator can access the HP Client Management Interface by writing simple scripts and integrating  
those scripts to the management solution of their choice.  
With the HP Client Management Interface (HP CMI), new HP business computers seamlessly integrate  
into your managed IT environment. HP CMI provides an interface that simplifies the integration of HP  
business computers with popular industry system management tools (including Microsoft Systems  
Management Server, IBM Tivoli Software, and HP OpenView Operations) and custom inhouse  
developed management applications. Using HP CMI, systems management tools and applications can  
request in-depth client inventory, receive health status information, and manage system BIOS settings  
by communicating directly with the client computer, reducing the need for agent or connector software  
to achieve integration.  
HP Client Management Interface is based on industry standards that include Microsoft Windows  
Management Interface (MS WMI), Web-Based Enterprise Management (WBEM), System Management  
BIOS (SMBIOS), and Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI). HP CMI is a foundation  
technology utilized in HP Client Management Solutions. With HP CMI, HP gives you flexibility in choosing  
how you manage your HP client computers.  
24 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
HP Client Management Interface used in conjunction with system management software can:  
Request in-depth client inventory information—Capture detailed information about the processors,  
hard drives, memory, BIOS, drivers, including sensor information (such as fan speed, voltage, and  
temperature).  
Receive health status information—Subscribe for a wide range of client hardware alerts (such as  
over-temperature, fan stall, and hardware configuration changes) to be sent to the system  
management console, application, or to the local client computer. Alerts are sent real-time when  
triggered by hardware events.  
Manage system BIOS settings—Perform F10 functions including setting and changing the BIOS  
passwords and computer boot order remotely from your system management console on any or  
all of your client systems without having to visit each machine.  
For more information on HP Client Management Interface, refer to http://www.hp.com/go/hpcmi/.  
HP System Software Manager  
HP System Software Manager (SSM) is a free utility that automates remote deployment of device drivers  
and BIOS updates for your networked HP business PCs. When SSM runs, it silently (without user  
interaction) determines the revision levels of drivers and BIOS installed on each networked client system  
and compares this inventory against system software SoftPaqs that have been tested and stored in a  
central file store. SSM then automatically updates any down-revision system software on the networked  
PCs to the later levels available in the file store. Since SSM only allows distribution of SoftPaq updates  
to the correct client system models, administrators can confidently and efficiently use SSM to keep  
system software updated.  
System Software Manager integrates with enterprise software distribution tools such as HP OpenView  
PC Configuration Management Solution (not currently available for Windows Vista), Altiris HP Client  
Manager, and Microsoft Systems Management Server (SMS). Using SSM, you can distribute customer-  
created or third-party updates that have been packaged in the SSM-format.  
SSM may be downloaded at no charge by visiting http://www.hp.com/go/ssm.  
NOTE: SSM does not currently support remote ROM flash on systems that have Windows Vista  
BitLocker enabled and are using TPM measurements to protect the BitLocker keys because flashing  
the BIOS would invalidate the trust signature that BitLocker created for the platform. Disable BitLocker  
via Group Policy in order to flash the system BIOS.  
You can enable BitLocker support without TPM measurements of BIOS to avoid invalidating the  
BitLocker keys. HP recommends you keep a secure backup of the BitLocker credentials in case of  
recovery emergencies.  
HP Client Manager  
HP Client Manager, developed with Altiris, is available free for all supported HP business desktop,  
notebook, and workstation models. SSM is integrated into HP Client Manager, and enables central  
tracking, monitoring, and management of the hardware aspects of HP client systems.  
Use HP Client Manager to:  
Get valuable hardware information such as CPU, memory, video, and security settings  
Monitor system health to fix problems before they occur  
Automatically acquire and install drivers and BIOS updates without visiting each PC  
Software Updating and Management 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Remotely configure BIOS and security settings  
Automate processes to quickly resolve hardware problems  
Tight integration with HP Instant Support tools reduces hardware troubleshooting time.  
Diagnostics—remotely run & view reports on HP desktop, notebook, and workstation models  
System Health Scan—check for known hardware issues in your installed base of HP client systems  
Active Chat—connect to HP customer support to resolve issues  
HP Knowledgebase—link to expert information  
Automated SoftPaq collection and delivery process for fast resolution of hardware problems  
Identify, inventory, and initialize systems with HP ProtectTools embedded security chip  
Option for health alerts to display locally on the client system  
Report basic inventory information for non-HP clients  
Setup and configure TPM security chip  
Centrally schedule client backup and recovery  
Add on support for managing Intel AMT  
For more information on HP Client Manager, visit http://www.hp.com/go/clientmanager.  
HP ProtectTools Security Manager  
HP ProtectTools Security Manager software provides security features that help protect against  
unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. Enhanced security functionality is  
provided by the following modules:  
Embedded Security for HP ProtectTools  
BIOS Configuration for HP ProtectTools  
Credential Manager for HP ProtectTools  
Java Card for HP ProtectTools  
Drive Encryption for HP ProtectTools  
Device Access Manager for HP ProtectTools  
The modules available for your computer may vary depending on your model. For example, Embedded  
Security for HP ProtectTools requires that the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) embedded security chip  
(some models only) be installed on your computer, and Java Card for HP ProtectTools requires an  
optional smart card keyboard.  
All HP ProtectTools modules are included on every platform with the exception of Embedded Security  
and Drive Encryption. Visit http://www.hp.com/products/security for more information.  
26 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
HP Client Premium Suite  
HP Client Premium Suite (HP CPS) is designed for organizations wanting full client hardware and  
software lifecycle management from a single, Web-based management console. It combines:  
HP Client Manager  
HP Systems Insight Manager Connector  
HP OpenView Connector (not currently available for Windows Vista)  
Altiris Client Manager Suite - Level 1  
Altiris Connector Solution  
Altiris Local Recovery Pro  
Altiris AuditExpress  
For more information on HP Client Premium Suite, visit http://www.hp.com/go/easydeploy.  
HP Client Foundation Suite  
The HP Client Foundation Suite (HP CFS) is designed for organizations wanting essential client  
management functionality. It combines:  
HP Client Manager  
HP Systems Insight Manager Connector  
Altiris Migration Suite  
Altiris Local Recovery Pro  
For more information about the HP Client Foundation Suite, visit http://www.hp.com/go/easydeploy.  
HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager  
NOTE: HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager is not currently available for Windows Vista.  
HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager is a hardware and software management solution for  
Windows XP and HP Thin Client environments that is easy to use and quick to deploy, while providing  
a strong foundation for future requirements. It is offered in two editions:  
The Basic Edition is a free product for managing HP desktops, notebooks and workstations,  
providing hardware and software inventory, remote control, HP alert monitoring, HP BIOS and  
driver updates, integration with HP Protect Tools and add-on support for Intel AMT. The Basic  
Edition also supports deployment and management of HP Thin Clients.  
The Premium Edition, available for purchase, includes all functionality provided in Basic Edition  
and adds Windows deployment and migration, patch management capabilities, software  
distribution and software usage metering.  
HP Client Configuration Manager provides a migration path to HP OpenView PC Configuration  
Management Solution (based on Radia technology) for automated management of large,  
heterogeneous and continuously changing IT environments.  
For more information about the HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager, visit  
Software Updating and Management 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solution  
NOTE: HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solution is not currently available for Windows  
Vista.  
HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solution is a policy-based solution that enables  
administrators to inventory, deploy, patch, and continuously manage software and content across  
heterogeneous client platforms. With the HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solution, the IT  
professional can:  
Automate the entire lifecycle management process from discovery, deployment, and ongoing  
management through migration and retirement  
Automatically deploy and continuously manage an entire software stack (operating systems,  
applications, patches, settings, and content) to a desired state  
Manage software on virtually any device, including desktops, workstations, and notebooks, in a  
heterogeneous or standalone infrastructure  
Manage software on most operating systems  
With continuous configuration management, HP customers report dramatic savings in IT costs,  
accelerated time-to-market for software and content, and increased user productivity and satisfaction.  
For more information on HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solution, visit  
HP Client Catalog for SMS  
Update management is an important function of maintaining any set of computers, from a single PC to  
an enterprise datacenter. The ability to identify which updates exist—and selectively deploy those  
updates in a timely and automated manner—can help maintain security and productivity for the managed  
organization. HP now offers a mechanism to streamline updates for HP systems within a Microsoft  
System Management Server management infrastructure. The HP Client Catalog for SMS contains  
software driver and patch information for desktop, mobile and workstation platforms. With SMS 2003  
R2 and Inventory Tool for Custom Updates, organizations can integrate and deploy HP software updates  
quickly and easily, based on detailed platform characteristics that the HP Client Catalog for SMS  
provides to target appropriate client systems within the managed enterprise.  
For more information on HP Client Catalog for SMS, visit http://www/hp/com/go/easydeploy/.  
HP Backup and Recovery Manager  
The HP Backup and Recovery Manager is an easy-to-use, versatile application that allows you to back  
up and recover the primary hard drive on the PC. The application works within Windows to create  
backups of Windows, all applications, and all data files. Backups can be scheduled to occur  
automatically at designated intervals, or they can be initiated manually. Important files can be archived  
separately from regular backups.  
HP Backup and Recovery Manager is preinstalled on the hard drive's Recovery Partition and allows you  
to:  
create Recovery Points to back up the entire system incrementally  
back up the entire system in a single archive  
back up individual files and folders  
28 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Recovery Points and file backups can be copied to CD or DVD discs, while all backups can be copied  
to network or secondary hard disks.  
HP highly recommends that you create a Recovery Disc Set immediately before using the computer  
and schedule regular automatic Recovery Point backups.  
To create the Recovery Disc Set:  
1. Click Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and Recovery Manager to open the  
Backup and Recovery Wizard, then click Next.  
2. Select Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended) and click Next.  
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.  
The HP Backup and Recovery Manager provides two basic recovery methods. The first, recovery of  
files and folders, operates in Windows. The second, PC Recovery, requires a reboot to the Recovery  
Partition or from the Recovery Disc Set. To reboot to the Recovery Partition, press F11 at startup when  
you see the message “Press F11 for Emergency Recovery.”  
For more information on using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, refer to the HP Backup and Recovery  
Manager User Guide by selecting Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and Recovery  
Manager Manual.  
NOTE: You can order a Recovery Disc Set from HP by calling the HP support center. Go to the  
following Web site, select your region, and click the Technical support after you buy link under the  
Call HP heading to obtain the support center telephone number for your region.  
Intel vPro-branded PCs with Active Management Technology  
Intel Active Management Technology (AMT) allows better discovery, healing, and protection of  
networked computing assets. With AMT, PCs can be managed whether the system is on, off, or the  
operating system is hung.  
Intel vPro features include:  
Hardware inventory information  
Alerting  
Power management—power on/off, cycle power  
Remote diagnosis and repair  
Serial-over-LAN—allows console control of remote PC during its boot phase  
IDE-Redirect—allows system booting from a remote boot drive, disk, or ISO image  
Hardware-based isolation and recovery—limit or cut off PC network access, if virus-like activity is  
detected  
Software Updating and Management 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NOTE: For an overview of Intel vPro technology, visit http://www.intel.com/vpro.  
For HP-specific information on Intel vPro technology, see the white papers at http://www.hp.com/  
support. Select your country and language, select See support and troubleshooting information,  
enter the model number of the computer, and press Enter. In the Resources category, click Manuals  
(guides, supplements, addendums, etc.). Under Quick jump to manuals by category, click White  
papers.  
On Intel vPro-branded PCs, available management technologies include the following:  
AMT  
ASF  
Virtualization Technology (VT)  
ASF and AMT may not be configured at the same time, but both are supported.  
To configure Intel vPro systems for AMT or ASF:  
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Microsoft Windows, click Start > Shut Down >  
Restart.  
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press the hot key, Ctrl+P, when the monitor light turns green.  
NOTE: If you do not press Ctrl+P at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and  
again press Ctrl+P when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
This hot-key enters the Intel Management Engine BIOS Execution (MEBx) setup utility. This utility allows  
the user to configure various aspects of the management technology. Configuration options include:  
ME Platform Configuration  
ME Platform State Control—enable/disable management engine  
ME Firmware Local Update—local enable/disable management of firmware updates  
LAN Controller—enable/disable integrated network controller  
ME Features Control—enable AMT, ASF, or none  
ME Power Control—configure management engine power policies  
Intel AMT Configuration  
Change AMT Password—required in order to configure AMT (the default password is  
admin)  
Host Name—allows administrator to assign a name to the client  
TCP/IP—allows administrator to assign an IP address or enable DHCP  
Provisioning Server—allows administrator to assign IP address of provisioning server  
Provision Model—allows administrator to configure either enterprise or SMB mode  
Set PID and PPS—allows administrator to provide pre-provisioning key (see HP’s white  
paper, Intel vPro Provisioning)  
Un-Provision—allows administrator to reset AMT configuration to factory defaults  
30 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VLAN—allows administrator to enable LAN virtualization support  
SOL/IDE-R—allows administrator to enable remote boot and control sessions  
Change MEBx Password (HP highly recommends that this password be changed. The default  
password is admin.)  
In order to remotely manage AMT systems, the administrator must use a remote console that supports  
AMT. Enterprise management consoles are available from suppliers such as HP OpenView (not  
currently available for Windows Vista), Altiris and Microsoft SMS. In SMB mode, the client provides a  
Web browser interface. To access this feature, open a browser from any other system on the network  
and enter http://host_name:16992where host_nameis the name assigned to the system.  
Alternatively, the IP address may be used in place of the host name.  
HP Proactive Change Notification  
The Proactive Change Notification program uses the Subscriber's Choice Web site in order to  
proactively and automatically:  
Send you Proactive Change Notification (PCN) e-mail informing you of hardware and software  
changes to most commercial computers and servers, up to 60 days in advance  
Send you e-mail containing Customer Bulletins, Customer Advisories, Customer Notes, Security  
Bulletins, and Driver alerts for most commercial computers and servers  
You create your own profile to ensure that you only receive the information relevant to a specific IT  
environment. To learn more about the Proactive Change Notification program and create a custom  
Subscriber’s Choice  
Subscriber’s Choice is a client-based service from HP.  
Based on your profile, HP will supply you with personalized product tips, feature articles, and/or driver  
and support alerts/notifications.  
Subscriber’s Choice Driver and Support Alerts/Notifications will deliver e-mails notifying you that the  
information you subscribed to in your profile is available for review and retrieval. To learn more about  
Subscriber’s Choice and create a custom profile, visit http://h30046.www3.hp.com/subhub.php.  
Retired Solutions  
Two software packages, Altiris Local Recovery, and Dantz Retrospect, will no longer be shipping on HP  
business desktops, notebooks, or workstations. Starting with new business desktops, notebooks, and  
workstations released in 2006, all will ship with HP Backup and Recovery Manager.  
ROM Flash  
The computer's BIOS is stored in a programmable flash ROM (read only memory). By establishing a  
setup password in the Computer Setup (F10) Utility, you can protect the ROM from being unintentionally  
updated or overwritten. This is important to ensure the operating integrity of the computer. Should you  
need or want to upgrade the BIOS, you may download the latest BIOS images from the HP driver and  
ROM Flash 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
CAUTION: For maximum ROM protection, be sure to establish a setup password. The setup password  
prevents unauthorized ROM upgrades. System Software Manager allows the system administrator to  
set the setup password on one or more PCs simultaneously. For more information, visit  
Remote ROM Flash  
Remote ROM Flash allows the system administrator to safely upgrade the BIOS on remote HP  
computers directly from the centralized network management console. Enabling the system  
administrator to perform this task remotely on multiple computers results in a consistent deployment of,  
and greater control over, HP PC BIOS images over the network. It also results in greater productivity  
and lower total cost of ownership.  
NOTE: SSM does not currently support remote ROM flash on systems that have Windows Vista  
BitLocker enabled and are using TPM measurements to protect the BitLocker keys because flashing  
the BIOS would invalidate the trust signature that BitLocker created for the platform. Disable BitLocker  
via Group Policy in order to flash the system BIOS.  
The computer must be powered on, or turned on through Remote Wakeup, to take advantage of Remote  
ROM Flash.  
For more information on Remote ROM Flash, refer to the HP Client Manager Software or System  
Software Manager at http://www.hp.com/go/ssm/.  
HPQFlash  
The HPQFlash utility is used to locally update or restore the system BIOS of individual PCs from a  
Windows operating system.  
For more information on HPQFlash, visit http://www.hp.com/support/files and enter the model number  
of the computer when prompted.  
Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode  
Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode permits system recovery in the unlikely event of a ROM flash  
failure. For example, if a power failure were to occur during a BIOS upgrade, the ROM flash would be  
incomplete. This would render the system BIOS unusable. The Boot Block is a flash-protected section  
of the ROM that contains code that checks for a valid system BIOS image when the system is turned  
on.  
If the system BIOS image is valid, the system starts normally.  
If the system BIOS image is not valid, a failsafe Boot Block BIOS provides enough support to search  
removable media for BIOS image files. If an appropriate BIOS image file is found, it is automatically  
flashed into the ROM.  
When an invalid system BIOS image is detected, the system power LED will blink red 8 times, one blink  
every second. Simultaneously, the speaker will beep 8 times. If the portion of the system ROM containing  
the video option ROM image is not corrupt, Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode will be displayed  
on the screen.  
32 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
To recover the system after it enters Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode, complete the following  
steps:  
1. Turn off the power.  
2. Insert a CD or USB flash device containing the desired BIOS image file in the root directory.  
NOTE: The media must be formatted using the FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32 file system.  
3. Turn on the computer.  
If no appropriate BIOS image is found, you will be prompted to insert media containing a BIOS  
image file.  
If the system successfully reprograms the ROM, the system will automatically power off.  
4. Remove the removable media used to upgrade the BIOS.  
5. Turn the power on to restart the computer.  
NOTE: BitLocker prevents Windows Vista from booting when a CD containing the BIOS image file is  
in an optical drive. If BitLocker is enabled, remove this CD before attempting to boot to Windows Vista.  
Replicating the Setup  
The following procedures give an administrator the ability to easily copy one setup configuration to other  
computers of the same model. This allows for faster, more consistent configuration of multiple  
computers.  
NOTE: Both procedures require a diskette drive or a supported USB flash media device, such as an  
HP Drive Key.  
Copying to Single Computer  
CAUTION: A setup configuration is model-specific. File system corruption may result if source and  
target computers are not the same model. For example, do not copy the setup configuration from a  
dc7xxx PC to a dx7xxx PC.  
1. Select a setup configuration to copy. Turn off the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start >  
Shut Down > Shut Down.  
2. If you are using a USB flash media device, insert it now.  
3. Turn on the computer.  
4. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter  
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again  
press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
5. If you are using a diskette, insert it now.  
6. Click File > Replicated Setup > Save to Removable Media. Follow the instructions on the screen  
to create the configuration diskette or USB flash media device.  
7. Turn off the computer to be configured and insert the configuration diskette or USB flash media  
device.  
Replicating the Setup 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8. Turn on the computer to be configured.  
9. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter  
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
10. Click File > Replicated Setup > Restore from Removable Media, and follow the instructions on  
the screen.  
11. Restart the computer when the configuration is complete.  
Copying to Multiple Computers  
CAUTION: A setup configuration is model-specific. File system corruption may result if source and  
target computers are not the same model. For example, do not copy the setup configuration from a  
dx57xx PC to a dx7xxx PC.  
This method takes a little longer to prepare the configuration diskette or USB flash media device, but  
copying the configuration to target computers is significantly faster.  
NOTE: A bootable diskette is required for this procedure or to create a bootable USB flash media  
device. If Windows XP is not available to use to create a bootable diskette, use the method for copying  
to a single computer instead (see Copying to Single Computer on page 33).  
1. Create a bootable diskette or USB flash media device. See Supported USB Flash Media Device  
CAUTION: Not all computers can be booted from a USB flash media device. If the default boot  
order in the Computer Setup (F10) Utility lists the USB device before the hard drive, the computer  
can be booted from a USB flash media device. Otherwise, a bootable diskette must be used.  
2. Select a setup configuration to copy. Turn off the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start >  
Shut Down > Shut Down.  
3. If you are using a USB flash media device, insert it now.  
4. Turn on the computer.  
5. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter  
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again  
press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
6. If you are using a diskette, insert it now.  
7. Click File > Replicated Setup > Save to Removable Media. Follow the instructions on the screen  
to create the configuration diskette or USB flash media device.  
8. Download a BIOS utility for replicating setup (repset.exe) and copy it onto the configuration diskette  
or USB flash media device. To obtain this utility, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/  
support.html and enter the model number of the computer.  
9. On the configuration diskette or USB flash media device, create an autoexec.bat file containing the  
following command:  
repset.exe  
34 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
10. Turn off the computer to be configured. Insert the configuration diskette or USB flash media device  
and turn the computer on. The configuration utility will run automatically.  
11. Restart the computer when the configuration is complete.  
Creating a Bootable Device  
Supported USB Flash Media Device  
Supported devices have a preinstalled image to simplify the process of making them bootable. All HP  
or Compaq and most other USB flash media devices have this preinstalled image. If the USB flash media  
device being used does not have this image, use the procedure later in this section (see Unsupported  
To create a bootable USB flash media device, you must have:  
a supported USB flash media device  
a bootable DOS diskette with the FDISK and SYS programs (If SYS is not available, FORMAT may  
be used, but all existing files on the USB flash media device will be lost.)  
a PC that is bootable from a USB flash media device  
CAUTION: Some older PCs may not be bootable from a USB flash media device. If the default boot  
order in the Computer Setup (F10) Utility lists the USB device before the hard drive, the computer can  
be booted from a USB flash media device. Otherwise, a bootable diskette must be used.  
1. Turn off the computer.  
2. Insert the USB flash media device into one of the computer's USB ports and remove all other USB  
storage devices except USB diskette drives.  
3. Insert a bootable DOS diskette with FDISK.COM and either SYS.COM or FORMAT.COM into a  
diskette drive and turn on the computer to boot to the DOS diskette.  
4. Run FDISK from the A:\ prompt by typing FDISKand pressing Enter. If prompted, click Yes (Y) to  
enable large disk support.  
5. Enter Choice [5] to display the drives in the system. The USB flash media device will be the drive  
that closely matches the size of one of the drives listed. It will usually be the last drive in the list.  
Note the letter of the drive.  
USB flash media device drive: __________  
CAUTION: If a drive does not match the USB flash media device, do not proceed. Data loss can  
occur. Check all USB ports for additional storage devices. If any are found, remove them, reboot  
the computer, and proceed from step 4. If none are found, either the system does not support the  
USB flash media device or the USB flash media device is defective. DO NOT proceed in attempting  
to make the USB flash media device bootable.  
6. Exit FDISK by pressing the Esc key to return to the A:\ prompt.  
7. If your bootable DOS diskette contains SYS.COM, go to step 8. Otherwise, go to step 9.  
8. At the A:\ prompt, enter SYS x:where x represents the drive letter noted above.  
CAUTION: Be sure that you have entered the correct drive letter for the USB flash media device.  
Replicating the Setup 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
After the system files have been transferred, SYS will return to the A:\ prompt. Go to step 13.  
9. Copy any files you want to keep from your USB flash media device to a temporary directory on  
another drive (for example, the system's internal hard drive).  
10. At the A:\ prompt, enter FORMAT /S X:where Xrepresents the drive letter noted before.  
CAUTION: Be sure that you have entered the correct drive letter for the USB flash media device.  
FORMAT will display one or more warnings and ask you each time whether you want to proceed.  
Enter Yeach time. FORMAT will format the USB flash media device, add the system files, and ask  
for a Volume Label.  
11. Press Enter for no label or enter one if desired.  
12. Copy any files you saved in step 9 back to your USB flash media device.  
13. Remove the diskette and reboot the computer. The computer will boot to the USB flash media  
device as drive C.  
NOTE: The default boot order varies from computer to computer, and it can be changed in the  
Computer Setup (F10) Utility.  
If you have used a DOS version from Windows 9x, you may see a brief Windows logo screen. If  
you do not want this screen, add a zero-length file named LOGO.SYS to the root directory of the  
USB flash media device.  
Unsupported USB Flash Media Device  
To create a bootable USB flash media device, you must have:  
a USB flash media device  
a bootable DOS diskette with the FDISK and SYS programs (If SYS is not available, FORMAT may  
be used, but all existing files on the USB flash media device will be lost.)  
a PC that is bootable from a USB flash media device  
CAUTION: Some older PCs may not be bootable from a USB flash media device. If the default boot  
order in the Computer Setup (F10) Utility lists the USB device before the hard drive, the computer can  
be booted from a USB flash media device. Otherwise, a bootable diskette must be used.  
1. If there are any PCI cards in the system that have SCSI, ATA RAID or SATA drives attached, turn  
off the computer and unplug the power cord.  
CAUTION: The power cord MUST be unplugged.  
2. Open the computer and remove the PCI cards.  
3. Insert the USB flash media device into one of the computer's USB ports and remove all other USB  
storage devices except USB diskette drives. Close the computer cover.  
4. Plug in the power cord and turn on the computer.  
5. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter  
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
36 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again  
press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
6. Go to Advanced > PCI Devices to disable both the PATA and SATA controllers. When disabling  
the SATA controller, note the IRQ to which the controller is assigned. You will need to reassign the  
IRQ later. Exit setup, confirming the changes.  
SATA IRQ: __________  
NOTE: Only USDT models include a PATA controller.  
7. Insert a bootable DOS diskette with FDISK.COM and either SYS.COM or FORMAT.COM into a  
diskette drive and turn on the computer to boot to the DOS diskette.  
8. Run FDISK and delete any existing partitions on the USB flash media device. Create a new partition  
and mark it active. Exit FDISK by pressing the Esc key.  
9. If the system did not automatically restart when exiting FDISK, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to reboot to the  
DOS diskette.  
10. At the A:\ prompt, type FORMAT C: /Sand press Enter. Format will format the USB flash media  
device, add the system files, and ask for a Volume Label.  
11. Press Enter for no label or enter one if desired.  
12. Turn off the computer and unplug the power cord. Open the computer and reinstall any PCI cards  
that were previously removed. Close the computer cover.  
13. Plug in the power cord, remove the diskette, and turn on the computer.  
14. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter  
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
15. Go to Advanced > PCI Devices and re-enable the PATA and SATA controllers that were disabled  
in step 6. Put the SATA controller on its original IRQ.  
16. Save the changes and exit. The computer will boot to the USB flash media device as drive C.  
NOTE: The default boot order varies from computer to computer, and it can be changed in the  
Computer Setup (F10) Utility. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the  
Documentation and Diagnostics CD for instructions.  
If you have used a DOS version from Windows 9x, you may see a brief Windows logo screen. If  
you do not want this screen, add a zero-length file named LOGO.SYS to the root directory of the  
USB flash media device.  
Dual-State Power Button  
With Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) enabled, the power button can function either  
as an on/off switch or as a standby button. The standby feature does not completely turn off power, but  
instead causes the computer to enter a low-power standby state. This allows you to power down quickly  
without closing applications and to return quickly to the same operational state without any data loss.  
Dual-State Power Button 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To change the power button’s configuration, complete the following steps:  
1. Left click on the Start Button, then select Control Panel > Power Options.  
2. In the Power Options Properties, select the Advanced tab.  
3. In the Power Button section, select Stand by.  
After configuring the power button to function as a standby button, press the power button to put the  
system in a very low power state (standby). Press the button again to quickly bring the system out of  
standby to full power status. To completely turn off all power to the system, press and hold the power  
button for four seconds.  
CAUTION: Do not use the power button to turn off the computer unless the system is not responding;  
turning off the power without operating system interaction could cause damage to or loss of data on the  
hard drive.  
HP Web Site Support  
HP engineers rigorously test and debug software developed by HP and third-party suppliers, and  
develop operating system specific support software, to ensure performance, compatibility, and reliability  
for HP computers.  
When making the transition to new or revised operating systems, it is important to implement the support  
software designed for that operating system. If you plan to run a version of Microsoft Windows that is  
different from the version included with the computer, you must install corresponding device drivers and  
utilities to ensure that all features are supported and functioning properly.  
HP has made the task of locating, accessing, evaluating, and installing the latest support software easier.  
You can download the software from http://www.hp.com/support.  
The Web site contains the latest device drivers, utilities, and flashable ROM images needed to run the  
latest Microsoft Windows operating system on the HP computer.  
Industry Standards  
HP management solutions integrate with other systems management applications, and are based on  
industry standards, such as:  
Web-Based Enterprise Management (WBEM)  
Windows Management Interface (WMI)  
Wake on LAN Technology  
ACPI  
SMBIOS  
Pre-boot Execution (PXE) support  
Asset Tracking and Security  
Asset tracking features incorporated into the computer provide key asset tracking data that can be  
managed using HP Systems Insight Manager, HP Client Manager, HP OpenView PC Configuration  
Management, OpenView Client Configuration Manager, and Asset Management solutions (not currently  
38 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
available for Windows Vista), or other system management applications. Seamless, automatic  
integration between asset tracking features and these products enables you to choose the management  
tool that is best suited to the environment and to leverage the investment in existing tools.  
HP also offers several solutions for controlling access to valuable components and information.  
Embedded Security for HP ProtectTools, if installed, prevents unauthorized access to data and checks  
system integrity and authenticates third-party users attempting system access. (For more information,  
refer to the HP ProtectTools Security Manager Guide at http://www.hp.com.) Security features such as  
Embedded Security for HP ProtectTools, the Smart Cover Sensor and the Smart Cover Lock, available  
on some models, help to prevent unauthorized access to the internal components of the personal  
computer. By disabling parallel, serial, or USB ports, or by disabling removable media boot capability,  
you can protect valuable data assets. Memory Change and Smart Cover Sensor alerts can be  
automatically forwarded to system management applications to deliver proactive notification of  
tampering with a computer’s internal components.  
NOTE: Embedded Security for HP ProtectTools, the Smart Cover Sensor, and the Smart Cover Lock  
are available as options on some systems.  
Use the following utilities to manage security settings on the HP computer:  
Locally, using the Computer Setup Utilities. See the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the  
Documentation and Diagnostics CD included with the computer for additional information and  
instructions on using the Computer Setup Utilities. Some computers also have BIOS Configuration  
for HP ProtectTools, which is a Windows-based component of HP ProtectTools Security Manager  
that allows administrators to configure BIOS security settings from within the running OS.  
Remotely, using HP Client Manager Software, OpenView Client Configuration Manager, or System  
Software Manager. This software enables the secure, consistent deployment and control of security  
settings.  
The following table and sections refer to managing security features of the computer locally through the  
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities.  
Table 4-1 Security Features Overview  
Option  
Description  
Setup Password  
Allows you to set and enable setup (administrator) password.  
NOTE: If the setup password is set, it is required to change Computer Setup  
options, flash the ROM, and make changes to certain plug and play settings  
under Windows.  
See the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation and  
Diagnostics CD for more information.  
Power-On Password  
Password Options  
Allows you to set and enable power-on password.  
See the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation and  
Diagnostics CD for more information.  
Allows you to specify whether the password is required for warm boot (Ctrl  
+Alt+Del).  
(This selection will appear only if a  
power-on password is set.)  
See the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation and  
Diagnostics CD for more information.  
Asset Tracking and Security 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 4-1 Security Features Overview (continued)  
Option  
Description  
Pre-Boot Authorization  
Allows you to enable/disable the Smart Card to be used in place of the Power-  
On Password.  
Smart Cover  
Allows you to:  
Enable/disable the Cover Lock.  
Enable/disable the Cover Removal Sensor.  
NOTE: Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that the  
cover has been removed. Setup Password requires that the setup password  
be entered to boot the computer if the sensor detects that the cover has been  
removed.  
This feature is supported on some models only. See the Computer Setup  
(F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for more  
information.  
Embedded Security  
Allows you to:  
Enable/disable the Embedded Security device.  
Reset the device to Factory Settings.  
This feature is supported on some models only. See the HP ProtectTools  
Security Manager Guide at http://www.hp.com  
Device Security  
Enables/disables serial ports, parallel port, front USB ports, system audio,  
network controllers (some models), and SCSI controllers (some models).  
Network Service Boot  
Enables/disables the computer’s ability to boot from an operating system  
installed on a network server. (The network controller must reside on the PCI  
bus or be embedded on the system board.)  
System IDs  
Allows you to set:  
Asset tag (18-byte identifier) and ownership Tag (80-byte identifier  
displayed during POST). See the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide  
on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for more information.  
Chassis serial number or Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) number.  
The UUID can only be updated if the current chassis serial number is  
invalid. (These ID numbers are normally set in the factory and are used  
to uniquely identify the system.)  
Keyboard locale setting (for example, English or German) for System ID  
entry.  
DriveLock (some models)  
Allows you to assign or modify a master or user password for ATA hard drives.  
When this feature is enabled, the user is prompted to provide one of the  
DriveLock passwords during POST. If neither is successfully entered, the  
hard drive will remain inaccessible until one of the passwords is successfully  
provided during a subsequent cold-boot sequence.  
NOTE: This selection will only appear when at least one ATA drive that  
supports the ATA Security command set is attached to the system.  
See the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation and  
Diagnostics CD for more information.  
For more information about Computer Setup, see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation and  
Diagnostics CD.  
Support for security features may vary depending on the specific computer configuration.  
40 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Password Security  
The power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the computer by requiring entry of a password  
to access applications or data each time the computer is turned on or restarted. The setup password  
specifically prevents unauthorized access to Computer Setup, and can also be used as an override to  
the power-on password. That is, when prompted for the power-on password, entering the setup  
password instead will allow access to the computer.  
A network-wide setup password can be established to enable the system administrator to log in to all  
network systems to perform maintenance without having to know the power-on password, even if one  
has been established.  
Establishing a Setup Password Using Computer Setup  
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools Security  
Manager Guide at http://www.hp.com. Establishing a setup password through Computer Setup prevents  
reconfiguration of the computer (use of the Computer Setup (F10) utility) until the password is entered.  
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.  
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter  
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again  
press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
3. Select Security, then select Setup Password and follow the instructions on the screen.  
4. Before exiting, click File > Save Changes and Exit.  
Establishing a Power-On Password Using Computer Setup  
Establishing a power-on password through Computer Setup prevents access to the computer when  
power is turned on, unless the password is entered. When a power-on password is set, Computer Setup  
presents Password Options under the Security menu. Password options include Password Prompt  
on Warm Boot. When Password Prompt on Warm Boot is enabled, the password must also be  
entered each time the computer is rebooted.  
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.  
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter  
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again  
press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
3. Select Security, then Power-On Password and follow the instructions on the screen.  
4. Before exiting, click File > Save Changes and Exit.  
Entering a Power-On Password  
To enter a power-on password, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart the  
Computer.  
2. When the key icon appears on the monitor, type the current password, then press Enter.  
Asset Tracking and Security 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
NOTE: Type carefully; for security reasons, the characters you type do not appear on the screen.  
If you enter the password incorrectly, a broken key icon appears. Try again. After three unsuccessful  
tries, you must turn off the computer, then turn it on again before you can continue.  
Entering a Setup Password  
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools Security  
Manager Guide at http://www.hp.com.  
If a setup password has been established on the computer, you will be prompted to enter it each time  
you run Computer Setup.  
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.  
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter  
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again  
press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
3. When the key icon appears on the monitor, type the setup password, then press Enter.  
NOTE: Type carefully; for security reasons, the characters you type do not appear on the screen.  
If you enter the password incorrectly, a broken key icon appears. Try again. After three unsuccessful  
tries, you must turn off the computer, then turn it on again before you can continue.  
Changing a Power-On or Setup Password  
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools Security  
Manager Guide at http://www.hp.com.  
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart the  
Computer.  
2. To change the Power-On password, go to step 3.  
To change the Setup password, as soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor  
light turns green to enter Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again  
press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
3. When the key icon appears, type the current password, a slash (/) or alternate delimiter character,  
the new password, another slash (/) or alternate delimiter character, and the new password again  
as shown: current password/new password/new password  
NOTE: Type carefully; for security reasons, the characters you type do not appear on the screen.  
4. Press Enter.  
The new password takes effect the next time you turn on the computer.  
NOTE: Refer to the National Keyboard Delimiter Characters on page 43 for information about the  
alternate delimiter characters. The power-on password and setup password may also be changed using  
the Security options in Computer Setup.  
42 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Deleting a Power-On or Setup Password  
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools Security  
Manager Guide at http://www.hp.com.  
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart the  
Computer.  
2. To delete the Power-On password, go to step 3.  
To delete the Setup password, as soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor  
light turns green to enter Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again  
press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
3. When the key icon appears, type the current password followed by a slash (/) or alternate delimiter  
character as shown: current password/  
4. Press Enter.  
NOTE: Refer to National Keyboard Delimiter Characters on page 43 for information about the  
alternate delimiter characters. The power-on password and setup password may also be changed  
using the Security options in Computer Setup.  
National Keyboard Delimiter Characters  
Each keyboard is designed to meet country-specific requirements. The syntax and keys that you use to  
change or delete the password depend on the keyboard that came with the computer.  
National Keyboard Delimiter Characters  
/
Arabic  
-
.
Greek  
/
-
-
/
-
/
/
.
/
Russian  
=
-
/
Belgian  
Hebrew  
Slovakian  
Spanish  
BHCSY  
Brazilian  
Chinese  
Czech  
-
-
/
Hungarian  
Italian  
Swedish/Finnish  
Swiss  
/
Japanese  
Korean  
-
-
!
/
Taiwanese  
Thai  
Danish  
-
-
-
-
Latin American  
Norwegian  
Polish  
French  
Turkish  
é
-
French Canadian  
German  
U.S. English  
Portuguese  
For Bosnia-Herzegovina, Croatia, Slovenia, and Yugoslavia  
Clearing Passwords  
If you forget the password, you cannot access the computer. Refer to the Troubleshooting Guide on  
the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for instructions on clearing passwords.  
Asset Tracking and Security 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools Security  
Manager Guide at http://www.hp.com.  
DriveLock  
DriveLock is an industry-standard security feature that prevents unauthorized access to the data on ATA  
hard drive. DriveLock has been implemented as an extension to Computer Setup. It is only available  
when hard drives that support the ATA Security command set are detected. DriveLock is intended for  
HP customers for whom data security is the paramount concern. For such customers, the cost of the  
hard drive is inconsequential compared with the loss of the data stored on it and the damage that could  
result. To balance this level of security with the practical need to accommodate a forgotten password,  
the HP implementation of DriveLock employs a two-password security scheme. One password is  
intended to be set and used by a system administrator while the other is typically set and used by the  
end-user. There is no "back-door" that can be used to unlock the drive if both passwords are lost.  
Therefore, DriveLock is most safely used when the data contained on the hard drive is replicated on a  
corporate information system or is regularly backed up. In the event that both DriveLock passwords are  
lost, the hard drive is rendered unusable. For users who do not fit the previously defined customer profile,  
this may be an unacceptable risk. For users who do fit the customer profile, it may be a tolerable risk  
given the nature of the data stored on the hard drive.  
Using DriveLock  
When one or more hard drives that support the ATA Security command set are detected, the DriveLock  
option appears under the Security menu in Computer Setup. The user is presented with options to set  
the master password or to enable DriveLock. A user password must be provided in order to enable  
DriveLock. Since the initial configuration of DriveLock is typically performed by a system administrator,  
a master password should be set first. HP encourages system administrators to set a master password  
whether they plan to enable DriveLock or keep it disabled. This will give the administrator the ability to  
modify DriveLock settings if the drive is locked in the future. Once the master password is set, the system  
administrator may enable DriveLock or choose to keep it disabled.  
If a locked hard drive is present, POST will require a password to unlock the device. If a power-on  
password is set and it matches the device’s user password, POST will not prompt the user to re-enter  
the password. Otherwise, the user will be prompted to enter a DriveLock password. On a cold boot,  
either the master or the user password may be used. On a warm boot, enter the same password used  
to unlock the drive during the preceding cold-boot. Users will have two attempts to enter a correct  
password. On a cold boot, if neither attempt succeeds, POST will continue but the drive will remain  
inaccessible. On a warm boot or restart from Windows, if neither attempt succeeds, POST will halt and  
the user will be instructed to cycle power.  
DriveLock Applications  
The most practical use of the DriveLock security feature is in a corporate environment. The system  
administrator would be responsible for configuring the hard drive which would involve, among other  
things, setting the DriveLock master password and a temporary user password. In the event that the  
user forgets the user password or the equipment is passed on to another employee, the master  
password can always be used to reset the user password and regain access to the hard drive.  
HP recommends that corporate system administrators who choose to enable DriveLock also establish  
a corporate policy for setting and maintaining master passwords. This should be done to prevent a  
situation where an employee intentionally or unintentionally sets both DriveLock passwords before  
leaving the company. In such a scenario, the hard drive would be rendered unusable and require  
replacement. Likewise, by not setting a master password, system administrators may find themselves  
locked out of a hard drive and unable to perform routine checks for unauthorized software, other asset  
control functions, and support.  
44 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
For users with less stringent security requirements, HP does not recommend enabling DriveLock. Users  
in this category include personal users or users who do not maintain sensitive data on their hard drives  
as a common practice. For these users, the potential loss of a hard drive resulting from forgetting both  
passwords is much greater than the value of the data DriveLock has been designed to protect. Access  
to Computer Setup and DriveLock can be restricted through the Setup password. By specifying a Setup  
password and not giving it to end users, system administrators are able to restrict users from enabling  
DriveLock.  
Smart Cover Sensor  
CoverRemoval Sensor, available on some models, is a combination of hardware and software  
technology that can alert you when the computer cover or side panel has been removed. There are  
three levels of protection, as described in the following table.  
Table 4-2 Smart Cover Sensor Protection Levels  
Level  
Setting  
Description  
Level 0  
Level 1  
Disabled  
Smart Cover Sensor is disabled (default).  
Notify User  
When the computer is restarted, the screen displays a message  
indicating that the computer cover or side panel has been removed.  
Level 2  
Setup Password  
When the computer is restarted, the screen displays a message  
indicating that the computer cover or side panel has been removed. You  
must enter the setup password to continue.  
NOTE: These settings can be changed using Computer Setup. For more information about Computer Setup,  
see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD.  
Setting the Smart Cover Sensor Protection Level  
To set the Smart Cover Sensor protection level, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.  
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter  
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again  
press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
3. Select Security > Smart Cover > Cover Removal Sensor, and select the desired security level.  
4. Before exiting, click File > Save Changes and Exit.  
Smart Cover Lock  
The Smart Cover Lock is a software-controllable cover lock featured on some HP computers. This lock  
prevents unauthorized access to the internal components. Computers ship with the Smart Cover Lock  
in the unlocked position.  
CAUTION: For maximum cover lock security, be sure to establish a setup password. The setup  
password prevents unauthorized access to the Computer Setup utility.  
NOTE: The Smart Cover Lock is available as an option on some systems.  
Asset Tracking and Security 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Locking the Smart Cover Lock  
To activate and lock the Smart Cover Lock, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.  
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter  
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again  
press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
3. Select Security > Smart Cover > Cover Lock > Lock option.  
4. Before exiting, click File > Save Changes and Exit.  
Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock  
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.  
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter  
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.  
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again  
press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.  
3. Select Security > Smart Cover > Cover Lock > Unlock.  
4. Before exiting, click File > Save Changes and Exit.  
Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key  
If you enable the Smart Cover Lock and cannot enter the password to disable the lock, you will need a  
Smart Cover FailSafe Key to open the computer cover. You will need the key in any of the following  
circumstances:  
Power outage  
Startup failure  
PC component failure (such as processor or power supply)  
Forgotten password  
CAUTION: The Smart Cover FailSafe Key is a specialized tool available from HP. Be prepared; order  
this key before you need oneat an authorized reseller or service provider.  
To obtain the FailSafe Key, do any one of the following:  
Contact an authorized HP reseller or service provider.  
Call the appropriate number listed in the warranty.  
For more information about using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key, consult the Hardware Reference  
Guide on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD.  
46 Chapter 4 Desktop Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Cable Lock Provision  
The rear panel of the computer accommodates a cable lock so that the computer can be physically  
secured to a work area.  
For illustrated instructions, please see the Hardware Reference Guide on the Documentation and  
Diagnostics CD.  
Fingerprint Identification Technology  
Eliminating the need to enter user passwords, HP Fingerprint Identification Technology tightens network  
security, simplifies the login process, and reduces the costs associated with managing corporate  
networks. Affordably priced, it is not just for high-tech, high-security organizations anymore.  
NOTE: Support for Fingerprint Identification Technology varies by model.  
Fault Notification and Recovery  
Fault Notification and Recovery features combine innovative hardware and software technology to  
prevent the loss of critical data and minimize unplanned downtime.  
If the computer is connected to a network managed by HP Client Manager, the computer sends a fault  
notice to the network management application. With HP Client Manager Software, you can also remotely  
schedule diagnostics to automatically run on all managed PCs and create a summary report of failed  
tests.  
Drive Protection System  
The Drive Protection System (DPS) is a diagnostic tool built into the hard drives installed in some HP  
computers. DPS is designed to help diagnose problems that might result in unwarranted hard drive  
replacement.  
When HP computers are built, each installed hard drive is tested using DPS, and a permanent record  
of key information is written onto the drive. Each time DPS is run, test results are written to the hard  
drive. The service provider can use this information to help diagnose conditions that caused you to run  
the DPS software. Refer to the Troubleshooting Guide on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for  
instructions on using DPS.  
Surge-Tolerant Power Supply  
An integrated surge-tolerant power supply provides greater reliability when the computer is hit with an  
unpredictable power surge. This power supply is rated to withstand a power surge of up to 2000 volts  
without incurring any system downtime or data loss.  
Thermal Sensor  
The thermal sensor is a hardware and software feature that tracks the internal temperature of the  
computer. This feature displays a warning message when the normal range is exceeded, which gives  
you time to take action before internal components are damaged or data is lost.  
Asset Tracking and Security 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
5 Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines  
and Features  
NOTE: Serial ATA = SATA  
Parallel ATA = PATA  
SATA Hard Drives  
Serial ATA Hard Drive Characteristics  
Number of pins/conductors in data cable  
Number of pins in power cable  
Maximum data cable length  
Data interface voltage differential  
Drive voltages  
7/7  
15  
39.37 in (100 cm)  
400-700 mV  
3.3 V, 5 V, 12 V  
N/A  
Jumpers for configuring drive  
Data transfer rate  
3.0 Gb/s  
SATA connectors on the system board are color coded to make identification easier.  
SATA Identification  
Color  
Port  
Attachment Sequence  
Primary channel, device 0  
Primary channel, device 1  
Secondary channel, device 0  
Secondary channel, device 1  
Dark blue  
Light Blue  
White  
SATA 0  
SATA 4  
SATA 1  
SATA 5  
1
4
2
3
Orange  
NOTE: If there is an error on the application of the attach rules, a POST error message may be  
displayed.  
48 Chapter 5 Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SATA Hard Drive Cables  
SATA Data Cable  
Always use an HP approved SATA 3.0 Gb/s cable as it is fully backwards compatible with the SATA 1.5  
Gb/s drives.  
Current HP desktop products ship with SATA 3.0 Gb/s hard drives.  
SATA data cables are susceptible to damage if overflexed. Never crease a SATA data cable and never  
bend it tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.  
The SATA data cable is a thin, 7-pin cable designed to transmit data for only a single drive. As shown  
in the table, each cable has 3 grounds, and 4 transmit/receive pins.  
Pin Number  
Usage  
Ground  
A+  
Device Plug  
Ground  
Host Plug  
Ground  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
P5  
P6  
P7  
Transmit data  
Transmit data  
Ground  
Receive data  
Receive data  
Ground  
A-  
Ground  
B-  
Receive data  
Receive data  
Ground  
Transmit data  
Transmit data  
Ground  
B+  
Ground  
P2 and P3 differential signal pair  
P5 and P6 differential signal pair  
SATA Power Cable  
Pin  
Usage  
Notes  
Pin  
P9  
Usage  
Notes  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
P5  
P6  
P7  
P8  
V3.3  
3.3 V power  
3.3 V power  
3.3 V power  
V5  
5 V power  
V3.3  
P10  
P11  
P12  
P13  
P14  
P15  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
V12  
V3.3  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
V5  
12 V power  
12 V power  
12 V power  
V12  
5 V power  
5 V power  
V12  
V5  
SATA Hard Drive Cables 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
PATA Device Information  
The USDT model is the only product that supports a PATA optical drive. No PATA drives are supported  
on any other model.  
ATA SMART Drives  
The Self Monitoring Analysis and Recording Technology (SMART) ATA drives for the HP Personal  
Computers have built-in drive failure prediction that warns the user or network administrator of an  
impending failure or crash of the hard drive. The SMART drive tracks fault prediction and failure  
indication parameters such as reallocated sector count, spin retry count, and calibration retry count. If  
the drive determines that a failure is imminent, it generates a fault alert.  
Hard Drive Capacities  
The combination of the file system and the operating system used in the computer determines the  
maximum usable size of a drive partition. A drive partition is the largest segment of a drive that may be  
properly accessed by the operating system. A single hard drive may therefore be subdivided into a  
number of unique drive partitions in order to make use of all of its space.  
Because of the differences in the way that drive sizes are calculated, the size reported by the operating  
system may differ from that marked on the hard drive or listed in the computer specification. Drive size  
calculations by drive manufacturers are bytes to the base 10 while calculations by Microsoft are bytes  
to the base 2.  
Drive/Partition Capacity Limits  
Maximum Size  
File System  
FAT 32  
Controller Type  
Operating System  
Partition  
32 GB  
2 TB  
Drive  
2 TB  
2 TB  
ATA  
ATA  
Windows 2000/XP/Vista  
Windows 2000/XP/Vista  
NTFS  
50 Chapter 5 Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6 Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care,  
and Disassembly Preparation  
This chapter provides general service information for the computer. Adherence to the procedures and  
precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.  
CAUTION: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to the  
system board. You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the computer  
to prevent system board or component damage.  
Chassis Designations  
Convertible Minitower (CMT)  
Chassis Designations 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Small Form Factor (SFF)  
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT)  
52 Chapter 6 Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Electrostatic Discharge Information  
A sudden discharge of static electricity from your finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensitive  
devices or microcircuitry. Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, but damage occurs. An electronic  
device exposed to electrostatic discharge (ESD) may not appear to be affected at all and can work  
perfectly throughout a normal cycle. The device may function normally for a while, but it has been  
degraded in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy.  
Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in many cases, the discharge  
contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions.  
Generating Static  
The following table shows that:  
Different activities generate different amounts of static electricity.  
Static electricity increases as humidity decreases.  
Relative Humidity  
40%  
Event  
Walking across carpet  
55%  
10%  
7,500 V  
3,000 V  
400 V  
15,000 V  
5,000 V  
35,000 V  
12,000 V  
6,000 V  
2,000 V  
11,500 V  
14,500 V  
26,500 V  
21,000 V  
Walking across vinyl floor  
Motions of bench worker  
800 V  
Removing DIPs from plastic tube  
Removing DIPs from vinyl tray  
Removing DIPs from Styrofoam  
Removing bubble pack from PCB  
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box  
400 V  
700 V  
2,000 V  
3,500 V  
7,000 V  
5,000 V  
4,000 V  
5,000 V  
20,000 V  
11,000 V  
These are then multi-packaged inside plastic tubes, trays, or Styrofoam.  
NOTE: 700 volts can degrade a product.  
Preventing Electrostatic Damage to Equipment  
Many electronic components are sensitive to ESD. Circuitry design and structure determine the degree  
of sensitivity. The following packaging and grounding precautions are necessary to prevent damage to  
electric components and accessories.  
To avoid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers such as tubes, bags, or boxes.  
Protect all electrostatic parts and assemblies with conductive or approved containers or packaging.  
Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free stations.  
Place items on a grounded surface before removing them from their container.  
Always be properly grounded when touching a sensitive component or assembly.  
Electrostatic Discharge Information 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.  
Place reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies in protective packaging or conductive  
foam.  
Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment  
Use the following equipment to prevent static electricity damage to equipment:  
Wrist straps are flexible straps with a maximum of one-megohm ± 10% resistance in the ground  
cords. To provide proper ground, a strap must be worn snug against bare skin. The ground cord  
must be connected and fit snugly into the banana plug connector on the grounding mat or  
workstation.  
Heel straps/Toe straps/Boot straps can be used at standing workstations and are compatible  
with most types of shoes or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats, use them on both  
feet with a maximum of one-megohm ± 10% resistance between the operator and ground.  
Static Shielding Protection Levels  
Method  
Voltage  
1,500  
Antistatic plastic  
Carbon-loaded plastic  
Metallized laminate  
7,500  
15,000  
Grounding the Work Area  
To prevent static damage at the work area, use the following precautions:  
Cover the work surface with approved static-dissipative material. Provide a wrist strap connected  
to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment.  
Use static-dissipative mats, foot straps, or air ionizers to give added protection.  
Handle electrostatic sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCB laminate.  
Handle them only at static-free work areas.  
Turn off power and input signals before inserting and removing connectors or test equipment.  
Use fixtures made of static-safe materials when fixtures must directly contact dissipative surfaces.  
Keep work area free of nonconductive materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and  
Styrofoam.  
Use field service tools, such as cutters, screwdrivers, and vacuums, that are conductive.  
Recommended Materials and Equipment  
Materials and equipment that are recommended for use in preventing static electricity include:  
Antistatic tape  
Antistatic smocks, aprons, or sleeve protectors  
Conductive bins and other assembly or soldering aids  
54 Chapter 6 Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Conductive foam  
Conductive tabletop workstations with ground cord of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance  
Static-dissipative table or floor mats with hard tie to ground  
Field service kits  
Static awareness labels  
Wrist straps and footwear straps providing one-megohm +/- 10% resistance  
Material handling packages  
Conductive plastic bags  
Conductive plastic tubes  
Conductive tote boxes  
Opaque shielding bags  
Transparent metallized shielding bags  
Transparent shielding tubes  
Operating Guidelines  
To prevent overheating and to help prolong the life of the computer:  
Keep the computer away from excessive moisture, direct sunlight, and extremes of heat and cold.  
Operate the computer on a sturdy, level surface. Leave a 10.2-cm (4-inch) clearance on all vented  
sides of the computer and above the monitor to permit the required airflow.  
Never restrict the airflow into the computer by blocking any vents or air intakes. Do not place the  
keyboard, with the keyboard feet down, directly against the front of the desktop unit as this also  
restricts airflow.  
Occasionally clean the air vents on all vented sides of the computer. Lint, dust, and other foreign  
matter can block the vents and limit the airflow. Be sure to unplug the computer before cleaning  
the air vents.  
Never operate the computer with the cover or side panel removed.  
Do not stack computers on top of each other or place computers so near each other that they are  
subject to each other’s re-circulated or preheated air.  
If the computer is to be operated within a separate enclosure, intake and exhaust ventilation must  
be provided on the enclosure, and the same operating guidelines listed above will still apply.  
Keep liquids away from the computer and keyboard.  
Never cover the ventilation slots on the monitor with any type of material.  
Install or enable power management functions of the operating system or other software, including  
sleep states.  
Operating Guidelines 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Routine Care  
General Cleaning Safety Precautions  
1. Never use solvents or flammable solutions to clean the computer.  
2. Never immerse any parts in water or cleaning solutions; apply any liquids to a clean cloth and then  
use the cloth on the component.  
3. Always unplug the computer when cleaning with liquids or damp cloths.  
4. Always unplug the computer before cleaning the keyboard, mouse, or air vents.  
5. Disconnect the keyboard before cleaning it.  
6. Wear safety glasses equipped with side shields when cleaning the keyboard.  
Cleaning the Computer Case  
Follow all safety precautions in General Cleaning Safety Precautions on page 56 before cleaning the  
computer.  
To clean the computer case, follow the procedures described below:  
To remove light stains or dirt, use plain water with a clean, lint-free cloth or swab.  
For stronger stains, use a mild dishwashing liquid diluted with water. Rinse well by wiping it with a  
cloth or swab dampened with clear water.  
For stubborn stains, use isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol. No rinsing is needed as the alcohol will  
evaporate quickly and not leave a residue.  
After cleaning, always wipe the unit with a clean, lint-free cloth.  
Occasionally clean the air vents on the computer. Lint and other foreign matter can block the vents  
and limit the airflow.  
Cleaning the Keyboard  
Follow all safety precautions in General Cleaning Safety Precautions on page 56 before cleaning the  
keyboard.  
To clean the tops of the keys or the keyboard body, follow the procedures described in Cleaning the  
When cleaning debris from under the keys, review all rules in General Cleaning Safety Precautions  
on page 56 before following these procedures:  
CAUTION: Use safety glasses equipped with side shields before attempting to clean debris from under  
the keys.  
Visible debris underneath or between the keys may be removed by vacuuming or shaking.  
Canned, pressurized air may be used to clean debris from under the keys. Caution should be used  
as too much air pressure can dislodge lubricants applied under the wide keys.  
56 Chapter 6 Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
If you remove a key, use a specially designed key puller to prevent damage to the keys. This tool  
is available through many electronic supply outlets.  
CAUTION: Never remove a wide leveled key (like the space bar) from the keyboard. If these keys  
are improperly removed or installed, the keyboard may not function properly.  
Cleaning under a key may be done with a swab moistened with isopropyl alcohol and squeezed  
out. Be careful not to wipe away lubricants necessary for proper key functions. Use tweezers to  
remove any fibers or dirt in confined areas. Allow the parts to air dry before reassembly.  
Cleaning the Monitor  
Wipe the monitor screen with a clean cloth moistened with water or with a towelette designed for  
cleaning monitors. Do not use sprays or aerosols directly on the screen; the liquid may seep into  
the housing and damage a component. Never use solvents or flammable liquids on the monitor.  
To clean the monitor body follow the procedures in Cleaning the Computer Case on page 56.  
Cleaning the Mouse  
Before cleaning the mouse, ensure that the power to the computer is turned off.  
Clean the mouse ball by first removing the retaining plate and the ball from the housing. Pull out  
any debris from the ball socket and wipe the ball with a clean, dry cloth before reassembly.  
To clean the mouse body, follow the procedures in Cleaning the Computer Case on page 56.  
Service Considerations  
Listed below are some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during the disassembly and  
assembly of the computer.  
Power Supply Fan  
The power supply fan is a variable-speed fan based on the temperature in the power supply.  
CAUTION: The cooling fan is always on when the computer is in the “On” mode. The cooling fan is  
off when the computer is in “Standby,” “Suspend,” or “Off” modes.  
You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the computer to prevent  
system board or component damage.  
Tools and Software Requirements  
To service the computer, you need the following:  
Torx T-15 screwdriver (HP screwdriver with bits, PN 161946-001)  
Torx T-15 screwdriver with small diameter shank (for certain front bezel removal)  
Flat-bladed screwdriver (may sometimes be used in place of the Torx screwdriver)  
Phillips #2 screwdriver  
Service Considerations 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Diagnostics software  
HP tamper-resistant T-15 wrench (Smart Cover FailSafe Key, PN 166527-001) or HP tamper-  
resistant bits (Smart Cover FailSafe Key, PN 166527-002)  
Screws  
The screws used in the computer are not interchangeable. They may have standard or metric threads  
and may be of different lengths. If an incorrect screw is used during the reassembly process, it can  
damage the unit. HP strongly recommends that all screws removed during disassembly be kept with  
the part that was removed, then returned to their proper locations.  
CAUTION: Metric screws have a black finish. U.S. screws have a silver finish and are used on hard  
drives only.  
CAUTION: As each subassembly is removed from the computer, it should be placed away from the  
work area to prevent damage.  
Cables and Connectors  
Most cables used throughout the unit are flat, flexible cables. These cables must be handled with care  
to avoid damage. Apply only the tension required to seat or unseat the cables during insertion or removal  
from the connector. Handle cables by the connector whenever possible. In all cases, avoid bending or  
twisting the cables, and ensure that the cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught or  
snagged by parts being removed or replaced.  
CAUTION: When servicing this computer, ensure that cables are placed in their proper location during  
the reassembly process. Improper cable placement can damage the computer.  
Hard Drives  
Handle hard drives as delicate, precision components, avoiding all physical shock and vibration. This  
applies to failed drives as well as replacement spares.  
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective  
packaging and label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”  
Do not remove hard drives from the shipping package for storage. Keep hard drives in their  
protective packaging until they are actually mounted in the CPU.  
Avoid dropping drives from any height onto any surface.  
If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, turn off the computer. Do not remove a hard drive  
while the computer is on or in standby mode.  
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,  
avoid touching the connector. For more information about preventing electrostatic damage, refer  
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.  
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields  
such as monitors or speakers.  
58 Chapter 6 Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Lithium Coin Cell Battery  
The battery that comes with the computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a minimum  
lifetime of about three years.  
See the appropriate removal and replacement chapter for the chassis you are working on in this guide  
for instructions on the replacement procedures.  
WARNING! This computer contains a lithium battery. There is a risk of fire and chemical burn if the  
battery is handled improperly. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, dispose in  
water or fire, or expose it to temperatures higher than 140ºF (60ºC). Do not attempt to recharge the  
battery.  
NOTE: Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general  
household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public  
collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.  
Service Considerations 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7 Removal and Replacement Procedures  
Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.  
After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics utility to verify  
that all components operate properly.  
NOTE: Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.  
Preparation for Disassembly  
procedures.  
1. Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer (Unlocking the Smart  
2. Close any open software applications.  
3. Exit the operating system.  
4. Remove any diskette, compact disc, or media card from the computer.  
5. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.  
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.  
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as the  
system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the  
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be disconnected  
before servicing a unit.  
6. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.  
7. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.  
8. Lay the computer down on its side to achieve a safe working position.  
NOTE: During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing.  
Keep all screws with the units removed.  
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the wrong  
screw in an application may damage the unit.  
60 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock  
If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock use Computer Setup to unlock the lock. Refer to the Desktop  
Management Guide for more information about the Smart Cover Lock.  
If you cannot access Computer Setup to unlock the cover you will need to remove the locking solenoid  
by using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key (Spare part number 166527-001 for the wrench-style key or  
166527-002 for the screwdriver bit key). Once the solenoid has been deactivated or removed the access  
panel can be removed.  
You need the Smart Cover FailSafe Key in any of the following circumstances:  
Power outage  
Startup failure  
Processor or power supply failure  
Lost password  
To open the computer cover with the Smart Cover Lock engaged:  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key, remove the two tamper-proof screws that secure the Smart  
Cover Lock to the chassis.  
3. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
To reattach the Smart Cover Lock, secure the lock in place with the two tamper-proof screws.  
Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
External Security Devices  
The following security devices are used to prevent unauthorized access to the internal components of  
the computer and/or secure the computer to a fixed object.  
Installing a Cable Lock  
The cable lock may be used to secure the computer access panel to the chassis and, at the same time,  
secure the computer to a fixed object.  
Insert the cable lock in the location shown below.  
Installing a Padlock  
A padlock may be used by itself to secure the access panel to the computer chassis. A padlock may  
also be used with a security cable to secure the computer to a fixed object.  
62 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Hood Sensor  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Disconnect the hood sensor cable from the system board.  
4. Slide the hood sensor switch toward the front of the computer (1), and then pull it back through the  
slot (2).  
To install the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedure.  
Hood Sensor 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Computer Access Panel  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
CAUTION: Before removing the computer access panel, ensure that the computer is turned off  
and that the power cord is disconnected from the electrical outlet.  
2. Lift up on the access panel handle (1), slide the access panel back about 1.25 cm (1/2 inch), and  
then lift it up and off the unit (2).  
To install the access panel, reverse the removal procedure.  
64 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Front Bezel  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Push up on the two release tabs (1), and then rotate the front bezel away from the chassis to release  
it (2).  
To reinstall the front bezel, reverse the removal procedure.  
Front Bezel 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Bezel Blanks  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 65).  
4. Gently pull the subpanel, with the bezel blanks secured in it, away from the front bezel, then remove  
the desired bezel blank.  
CAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when pulling it away from the front bezel. Pulling the  
subpanel away at an angle could damage the pins that align it with the front bezel.  
To install a bezel blank, reverse the removal procedure.  
NOTE: When replacing the subpanel, ensure that the aligning pins and any remaining bezel blanks  
are in their proper orientation. The logo in the subpanel should be located at the bottom of the subpanel  
when properly oriented.  
66 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cable Management  
Always follow good cable management practices when working inside the computer.  
Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heatsink.  
Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like these  
are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.  
Keep cables clear of sliding or moveable parts to prevent them from being cut or crimped when  
the parts are moved.  
When folding a flat ribbon cable, never fold to a sharp crease. Sharp creases may damage the  
wires.  
Some flat ribbon cables come prefolded. Never change the folds on these cables.  
Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.  
Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.  
Never crease a SATA data cable.  
Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push cables  
down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.  
When removing the power supply power cables from the P1 or P3 connectors on the system board,  
always follow these steps:  
1. Squeeze on the top of the retaining latch attached to the cable end of the connector (1).  
2. Grasp the cable end of the connector and pull it straight up (2).  
CAUTION: Always pull the connector - NEVER pull on the cable. Pulling on the cable could  
damage the cable and result in a failed power supply.  
Cable Management 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cable Connections  
System board connectors are color-coded to make it easier to find the proper connection.  
System Board Connections  
System Board Connector, Name, and Connector Color Description  
P1, PWR, black  
Power supply, 24-pin  
P3, PWRCPU, black  
P10, FLOPPY, black  
P70, CPU FAN, white  
P8, CHASSIS FAN, brown or red  
P5, PB/LED, black  
P24, FRNT USB, Yellow  
P23, FRNT AUD, black  
P6, SPKR  
Power supply, 4-pin  
Diskette drive  
Heatsink fan  
Chassis fan  
Front power button/LED  
Front I/O USB cable  
Front I/O audio  
Internal speaker  
Serial port  
P52, SERIAL B  
P124, HLCK  
Hood lock solenoid  
Hood sensor  
P125, HSENSE  
P150, MEDIA CARD  
Media card reader  
Power Supply Cable Connections  
Power Supply Connector ID  
Description  
P1  
Main power  
P3  
CPU power  
P4  
1st Hard drive, SATA0  
P5  
2nd HDD  
P6  
PATA/Zip/Media card reader  
P8  
Diskette drive  
P9  
1st ODD or 2nd HDD if no ODD present, SATA1  
P10  
P11  
2nd ODD  
3rd ODD  
68 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Memory  
The computer comes with double data rate 2 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR2-  
SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).  
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to four industry-standard DIMMs.  
These memory sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled DIMM. To achieve the maximum  
memory support, you can populate the system board with up to 8 GB of memory configured in a  
highperforming dual channel mode.  
For proper system operation, the DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs must be:  
industry-standard 240-pin  
unbuffered, PC2-5300 667 MHz-compliant or PC2-6400 800 MHz-compliant  
1.8 volt DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs  
The DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs must also:  
support CAS latency 5 DDR2 667 Mhz (5-5-5 timing), CAS latency 5 DDR2 800 Mhz (5-5-5 timing),  
and CAS latency 6 DDR2 800 Mhz (6-6-6 timing)  
contain the mandatory JEDEC SPD information  
In addition, the computer supports:  
512Mbit and 1Gbit non-ECC memory technologies  
single-sided and double-sided DIMMs  
DIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 DDR devices; DIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM are not  
supported  
NOTE: The system will not operate properly if you install unsupported DIMMs.  
There are four DIMM sockets on the system board, with two sockets per channel. The sockets are  
labeled XMM1, XMM2, XMM3, and XMM4. Sockets XMM1 and XMM2 operate in memory channel A.  
Sockets XMM3 and XMM4 operate in memory channel B.  
Memory 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Item  
Description  
Socket Color  
1
2
3
4
DIMM socket XMM1, Channel A  
DIMM socket XMM2, Channel A  
DIMM socket XMM3, Channel B  
DIMM socket XMM4, Channel B  
Black  
White  
White  
White  
NOTE: A DIMM must occupy the black DIMM1 socket. Otherwise, the system  
will display a POST error message indicating that a memory module must be  
installed in the black socket.  
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,  
depending on how the DIMMs are installed.  
The system will operate in single channel mode if the DIMM sockets are populated in one channel  
only.  
The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the total memory capacity of  
the DIMMs in Channel A is equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. The  
technology and device width can vary between the channels. For example, if Channel A is  
populated with two 512-MB DIMMs and Channel B is populated with one 1GB DIMM, the system  
will operate in dual channel mode.  
The system will operate in flex mode if the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel A is not  
equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. In flex mode, the channel populated  
with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory assigned to dual channel  
and the remainder is assigned to single channel. For optimal speed, the channels should be  
balanced so that the largest amount of memory is spread between the two channels. If one channel  
will have more memory than the other, the larger amount should be assigned to Channel A. For  
example, if you are populating the sockets with one 1-GB DIMM, and three 512-MB DIMMs,  
Channel A should be populated with the 1-GB DIMM and one 512-MB DIMM, and Channel B should  
be populated with the two 512-MB DIMMs. With this configuration, 2-GB will run as dual channel  
and 512-MB will run as single channel.  
In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest DIMM in the system.  
CAUTION: The memory module sockets have gold metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it  
is important to use memory modules with gold metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or oxidation  
resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.  
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards. Before  
beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching a  
grounded metal object. Refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 53 for more information.  
When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so may damage  
the module.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
WARNING! To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system  
components to cool before touching.  
70 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Open both latches of the memory module socket (1), and insert the memory module into the socket  
(2).  
NOTE: A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with  
the tab on the memory socket.  
4. Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and properly  
seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position (3).  
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for any additional modules that you want to install.  
NOTE: The computer automatically recognizes the additional memory when the computer is turned  
on.  
To reassemble the computer, reverse the removal procedure.  
NOTE: If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and enable  
the Smart Cover Sensor.  
Memory 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Expansion Cards  
The computer has three standard full-height PCI expansion slots that can accommodate an expansion  
card up to 34 cm (13.4 inches) in length. The computer also has two PCI Express x1 expansion slots  
and one PCI Express x16 expansion slot.  
Item  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
PCI Express x16 expansion slot  
PCI Express x1 expansion slot  
PCI Express x1 expansion slot  
PCI expansion slot  
PCI expansion slot  
PCI expansion slot  
NOTE: You can install a PCI Express x1, x4, x8, or x16 expansion card in the PCI Express x16  
expansion slot.  
To remove, replace, or add an expansion card:  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Locate the correct vacant expansion socket on the system board and the corresponding expansion  
slot on the back of the computer chassis.  
72 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Press straight down on the two green thumb tabs inside the chassis (1) and rotate the expansion  
card retention latch up (2).  
5. Before installing an expansion card, remove the expansion slot cover or the existing expansion  
card.  
NOTE: Before removing an installed expansion card, disconnect any cables that may be attached  
to the expansion card.  
a. If you are installing an expansion card in a vacant socket, remove the appropriate expansion  
slot cover on the back of the chassis. Lift the expansion slot cover from the expansion slot.  
Expansion Cards 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
b. If you are removing a standard PCI card, hold the card at each end and carefully rock it back  
and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket. Lift the card straight up to remove it.  
Be sure not to scrape the card against other components.  
c. If you are removing a PCI Express x16 card, pull the retention arm on the back of the expansion  
socket away from the card and carefully rock the card back and forth until the connectors pull  
free from the socket. Lift the card straight up to remove it. Be sure not to scrape the card  
against other components.  
6. Store the removed card in anti-static packaging.  
7. If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the open  
slot.  
CAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or expansion  
slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.  
74 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8. To install a new expansion card, slide the bracket on the end of the card down into the slot on the  
back of the chassis and press the card down firmly into the socket on the system board.  
NOTE: When installing an expansion card, press firmly on the card so that the whole connector  
seats properly in the expansion card slot.  
9. Close the expansion card retention latch, making sure that it snaps firmly into place.  
10. Connect external cables to the installed card, if needed. Connect internal cables to the system  
board, if needed.  
Expansion Cards 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drives  
The computer supports up to five drives that may be installed in various configurations.  
When installing additional drives, follow these guidelines:  
The primary Serial ATA (SATA) hard drive must be connected to the dark blue SATA connector  
on the system board labeled SATA0.  
Connect the first SATA optical drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled  
SATA1.  
Always populate the dark blue SATA0 and white SATA1 connectors before the light blue SATA4  
and orange SATA5 connectors.  
Connect a second SATA optical drive to the orange SATA5 connector.  
Connect additional SATA hard drives to the next available (unpopulated) SATA connector on the  
system board in the following order: SATA0, SATA1, SATA5, SATA4.  
Connect a diskette drive to the connector labeled FLOPPY.  
Connect a media card reader to the USB connector labeled MEDIA CARD.  
The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) optical drives or PATA hard drives.  
You may install either a third-height or a half-height drive into a half-height bay.  
You must install guide screws to ensure the drive will line up correctly in the drive cage and lock  
in place. HP has provided extra guide screws installed on the chassis. The hard drive uses 6-32  
isolation mounting guide screws, four of which are installed on the hard drive bracket under the  
access panel. All other drives use M3 metric screws, eight of which are installed on the diskette  
drive bracket under the access panel. The HP-supplied metric guide screws are black. The HP-  
supplied 6-32 isolation mounting guide screws are silver and blue.  
6-32 isolation mounting screws for the hard drive (shown below).  
M3 metric screws for all drives other than hard drives (shown below).  
76 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:  
If you are inserting or removing a drive, shut down the operating system properly, turn off the computer,  
and unplug the power cord. Do not remove a drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.  
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive, avoid  
touching the connector. For more information about preventing electrostatic damage, see Electrostatic  
Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.  
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.  
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields  
such as monitors or speakers.  
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other protective packaging and label  
the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”  
Drives 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Board Drive Connections  
Refer to the following illustration and table to identify the system board drive connectors.  
No.  
System Board Connector  
System Board Label  
Color  
1
2
3
4
5
6
SATA0  
SATA0  
dark blue  
white  
SATA1  
SATA1  
SATA4  
SATA4  
light blue  
orange  
black  
SATA5  
SATA5  
Media Card Reader  
Diskette Drive  
MEDIA CARD  
FLOPPY  
black  
78 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Drive Positions  
1
Three 5.25-inch external drive bays for optional drives (optical drives and  
media card reader shown)1  
2
3
One 3.5-inch external drive bay for optional drives (diskette drive shown)2  
Two 3.5-inch internal hard drive bays  
1
An optional hard drive mounting bracket for these drive bays is available from HP. The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter  
depth than the upper two bays. The bottom bay supports a half-height drive or other device that is no more than 14.5 cm (5.7  
inches) in depth. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This could cause damage to  
the drive and the system board. The use of unnecessary force when installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage  
to the drive.  
2
Depending on the computer configuration, you may have a bezel blank in this position. If you do not have a drive in this slot,  
you may choose to install a 3.5-inch drive (such as a diskette drive, hard drive, or media card reader) later on.  
To verify the type and size of the storage devices installed in the computer, run Computer Setup. Refer  
to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide for more information.  
Drives 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installing a 3.5-inch Hard Drive into an Internal Drive Bay  
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:  
If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, shut down the operating system properly, then turn off the  
computer. Do not remove a hard drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.  
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive, avoid  
touching the connector. Refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 53 for more information  
about preventing electrostatic damage.  
Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.  
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.  
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields  
such as monitors or speakers.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 65).  
4. Disconnect the power (1) and data (2) cables from the back of the drive.  
NOTE: The right-angle data cable must be used for this chassis model when installing hard drives  
in the 3.5-inch bays to prevent cable damage from overflexing.  
5. Remove the hard drive SATA cable from the top of the fan shroud.  
80 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Pull up on the green hard drive drivelock mechanism (1) for that drive and slide the drive from the  
drive bay (2).  
7. Remove the four guide screws (two on each side) from the old drive and install them in the  
replacement drive.  
NOTE: Extra 6-32 isolation guide screws are provided on the hard drive bracket under the access  
panel. Optical drives use M3 metric screws. The HP-supplied metric screws are black.  
8. Store the removed drive in anti-static packaging.  
9. Install the new drive by sliding it into the appropriate drive bay on the front of the chassis. The  
drivelock automatically secures the drive in the bay.  
Drives 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing and Replacing a Removable 3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive  
Some models are equipped with a Removable SATA Hard Drive Enclosure in the 5.25-inch external  
drive bay. The hard drive is housed in a carrier that can be quickly and easily removed from the drive  
bay. To remove and replace a drive in the carrier:  
NOTE: Before you remove the old hard drive, be sure to back up the data from the old hard drive so  
that you can transfer the data to the new hard drive. Also, if you are replacing the primary hard drive,  
make sure you have created a Recovery Disc Set to restore the operating system, software drivers, and  
any software applications that were preinstalled on the computer. If you do not have this CD set,  
select Start > HP Backup and Recovery and create it now.  
1. Unlock the hard drive carrier with the key provided and slide the carrier out of the enclosure.  
2. Remove the screw from the rear of the carrier (1) and slide the top cover off the carrier (2).  
82 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Remove the adhesive strip that secures the thermal sensor to the top of the hard drive (1) and  
move the thermal sensor away from the carrier (2).  
4. Remove the four screws from the bottom of the hard drive carrier.  
Drives 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Slide the hard drive back to disconnect it from the carrier then lift it up and out of the carrier.  
6. Place the new hard drive in the carrier then slide the hard drive back so that it seats in the SATA  
connector on the carrier's circuit board. Be sure the connector on the hard drive is pressed all the  
way into the connector on the carrier's circuit board.  
84 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Replace the four screws in the bottom of the carrier to hold the drive securely in place.  
8. Place the thermal sensor on top of the hard drive in a position that does not cover the label (1) and  
attach the thermal sensor to the top of the hard drive with the adhesive strip (2).  
Drives 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Slide the cover on the carrier (1) and replace the screw on the rear of the carrier to secure the cover  
in place (2).  
10. Slide the hard drive carrier into the enclosure on the computer and lock it with the key provided.  
NOTE: The carrier must be locked for power to be supplied to the hard drive.  
86 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch Drive into an External Drive Bay  
NOTE: A 3.5-inch drive may be a diskette drive or a media card reader. A 5.25-inch drive may be an  
optical drive (DVD-ROM or SuperMulti LightScribe drive) or a media card reader with a 5.25-inch adapter  
kit attached.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. If you are installing a drive in a bay covered by a bezel blank, remove the front bezel then remove  
the bezel blank. See Front Bezel on page 65 for more information.  
4. Install two guide screws in the lower holes on each side of the drive (1).  
NOTE: Optical drives, diskette drives, and media card readers use M3 metric guide screws. Eight  
extra metric guide screws are provided on the diskette drive bracket under the access panel. The  
HP-supplied metric screws are black.  
If you are replacing a drive, transfer the guides screws from the old drive to the new one.  
5. Install the drive in the desired drive bay by sliding it all the way into the front of the drive cage until  
it locks (2). The drivelock automatically secures the drive in the bay.  
CAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The  
bottom bay supports a half-height drive or other device that is no more than 14.5 cm (5.7 inches)  
in depth. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This could  
cause damage to the drive and the system board. The use of unnecessary force when installing  
any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.  
NOTE: If you are installing a third optional drive, you may need to remove the strap that bundles  
the extra power connectors.  
Drives 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Connect the power cable (1) and data cable (2) to the rear of the optical drive or diskette drive.  
7. If you are installing a new drive, connect the opposite end of the data cable to the appropriate  
system board connector.  
NOTE: If you are installing a SATA optical drive, connect the first optical drive to the white SATA  
connector on the system board labeled SATA1. Connect a second optical drive to the orange SATA  
connector labeled SATA5.  
If you are installing a diskette drive, connect it to the connector on the system board labeled  
FLOPPY.  
If your are installing a media card reader, connect it to the USB system board connector labeled  
MEDIA CARD.  
88 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ReadyBoost Card  
A ReadyBoost card is installed in the computer. The card is secured to the chassis, and a cable connects  
the card to the system board.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Unplug the ReadyBoost cable from the system board, and then lift the card assembly from the  
chassis.  
To install the ReadyBoost card, reverse the removal procedure.  
ReadyBoost Card 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Front I/O Device and Power Switch  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 65).  
4. Disconnect the two I/O device cables and the power switch cable from the system board.  
5. Remove the audio cable from the clip on top of the fan shroud.  
6. Remove the screw that secures the device to the chassis (1).  
7. Slide the assembly toward the bottom of the unit (2), and then push it into the unit (3).  
8. Remove the device from the chassis, threading the cables and wire through the holes in the chassis.  
To reinstall the front I/O device and power switch, reverse the removal procedure.  
90 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fan Shroud  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Pull up on all four shroud tabs simultaneously and slide the shroud from the heatsink.  
To reinstall the fan shroud, reverse the removal procedure.  
Fan Shroud 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Heatsink  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Unscrew the four captive screws (1) that secure the heatsink to the system board.  
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an  
X) to even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the  
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.  
4. Remove the heatsink (2) from the processor.  
When reinstalling the heatsink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe and  
fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.  
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to  
evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are  
very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.  
92 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Processor  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Remove the heatsink (Heatsink on page 92).  
4. Rotate the locking lever to its full open position (1).  
5. Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position (2).  
6. Carefully lift the processor from the socket (3).  
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and  
handling them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to  
replace the system board.  
The heatsink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage to the  
processor’s solder connections.  
To install a new processor:  
1. Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.  
2. Secure the locking lever.  
If reusing the existing heatsink, go to step 3.  
If using a new heatsink, go to step 5.  
3. If reusing the existing heatsink, apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top of  
the processor.  
4. Clean the bottom of the heatsink with the provided alcohol pad and place it atop the processor.  
Processor 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and place  
it in position atop the processor.  
6. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws and  
attach the heatsink control cable to the system board.  
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an  
X) to evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the  
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.  
NOTE: After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to  
ensure that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can  
be found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.  
Speaker  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Disconnect the speaker wire from the system board, and remove the wire from the clip on top of  
the fan shroud.  
4. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the speaker to the chassis.  
5. Slide the speaker up and lift it out of the chassis (2).  
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.  
94 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Rear Chassis Fan  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Disconnect the fan control cable from the system board.  
4. Press down on the two upper tabs (1) to loosen the fan housing from the chassis.  
5. Rotate the fan forward (2), and then lift it up and out of the chassis (3).  
To install the fan assembly, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow out of the unit.  
Rear Chassis Fan 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Inner Chassis Fan  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Remove the heatsink (Heatsink on page 92).  
4. Disconnect the fan control cable from the system board.  
5. Push down on the tab at the top of the fan (1).  
6. Pull up on the fan (2), and then pull it toward the system board to remove it from the chassis (3).  
To install the fan assembly, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow out of the unit.  
Refer to the air flow arrows on the side of the fan housing for proper air flow orientation.  
96 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Serial Port  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Push down the green tabs (1), and then rotate the tab back 90 degrees out of the rear of the chassis  
(2).  
4. Disconnect the serial port cable from the system board (3).  
5. Remove the port assembly from the chassis (4).  
To install the serial port, reverse the removal procedure.  
Serial Port 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Power Supply  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Disconnect all power cables from the mass storage devices and from the system board.  
4. Remove the four screws that connect the power supply to the chassis.  
5. Press the tab in front of the power supply that holds it in place (1).  
6. Slide the power supply toward the front of the computer (2), rotate toward the fan so the power  
supply clears the lip on the top of the chassis (3), and then lift the power supply out of the chassis  
(4).  
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.  
98 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Board  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Remove all expansion boards (Expansion Cards on page 72).  
4. Disconnect all cables connected to the system board, noting their location for reinstallation.  
5. Remove the heatsink (Heatsink on page 92).  
6. Remove the 10 screws that secure the system board to the chassis (1).  
7. Slide the system board toward the front of the computer (2).  
8. Lift the system board out of the computer (3).  
NOTE: When replacing the system board, you must also change the chassis serial number in the  
BIOS.  
System Board 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Battery  
The battery that comes with your computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a lifetime of  
about three years. When replacing the battery, use a battery equivalent to the battery originally installed  
on the computer. The computer comes with a 3-volt lithium coin cell battery.  
NOTE: The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC wall  
socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.  
WARNING! This computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of  
fire and burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:  
Do not attempt to recharge the battery.  
Do not expose to temperatures higher than 140°F (60°C).  
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water.  
Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.  
CAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings. When  
the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared. Refer to the Computer Setup  
(F10) Utility Guide for information on backing up the CMOS settings.  
NOTE: HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges,  
and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/  
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional  
equipment. Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by  
briefly touching a grounded metal object.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove an expansion card to gain access to the battery.  
3. Locate the battery and battery holder on the system board.  
4. Depending on the type of battery holder on your system board, complete the following instructions  
to replace the battery:  
100 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Type 1 Battery Holder  
1. Lift the battery out of its holder.  
2. Slide the replacement battery into position, positive side up.  
3. The battery holder automatically secures the battery in the proper position.  
4. Replace the computer access panel.  
5. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.  
6. Reset the date and time and any special system setups using Computer Setup. Refer to the  
Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.  
Type 2 Battery Holder  
1. To release the battery from its holder, squeeze the metal clamp (1) that extends above one edge  
of the battery. When the battery pops up, lift it out.  
2. To insert the new battery, slide one edge of the replacement battery under the holder’s lip with the  
positive side up (2). Push the other edge down until the clamp snaps over the other edge of the  
battery.  
3. Replace the computer access panel.  
Battery 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.  
5. Reset the date and time and any special system setups using Computer Setup. Refer to the  
Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.  
Type 3 Battery Holder  
1. Pull back on the clip (1) that holds the battery in place, then remove the battery (2).  
2. Insert the new battery and position the clip back in place.  
3. Replace the computer access panel.  
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.  
5. Reset the date and time and any special system setups using Computer Setup. Refer to the  
Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.  
102 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing from a Desktop to a Minitower Configuration  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 65).  
4. Disconnect all power and data cables from the back of the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.  
5. To release the drives from the 5.25-inch drive bay, press down on the short yellow drivelock as  
shown. While pressing the drivelock, pull the drives out of the drive bay.  
6. Before you reinstall each drive into the chassis, turn it so that it is in the same orientation as the  
internal 3.5-inch drive. The bottom of the drive should be parallel to the yellow drivelock.  
7. Gently slide the drive into the uppermost available bay until it snaps into place. When the drive is  
properly inserted, the drivelock will secure it. Repeat this step for each drive.  
Changing from a Desktop to a Minitower Configuration 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The  
bottom bay supports a half-height drive or other device that is no more than 14.5 cm (5.7 inches)  
in depth. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This could  
cause damage to the drive and the system board. The use of unnecessary force when installing  
any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.  
8. Reconnect all power and data cables to the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.  
9. Remove the bezel subpanel as described in the Bezel Blanks on page 66 section.  
CAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when you pull it away from the front bezel. Pulling the  
subpanel away at an angle could damage the pins that align it within the front bezel.  
10. Reposition the bezel blanks within the subpanel in the proper orientation for the minitower  
configuration.  
11. Reposition the subpanel (rotate it 90º) with the logo at the bottom, then snap it back into the bezel.  
104 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing from a Minitower to a Desktop Configuration  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 60).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 64).  
3. Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 65).  
4. Disconnect all power and data cables from the back of the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.  
5. To release the drives from the 5.25-inch drive bay, lift the release tab on the green latch drive  
bracket for the drive. While lifting the release tab, slide the drive from its drive bay. Repeat this step  
for each 5.25-inch drive.  
6. Before you reinstall each drive into the chassis, turn the drive so that it is perpendicular to the  
internal 3.5-inch drive. The drive should be parallel to the green latch drive bracket.  
Changing from a Minitower to a Desktop Configuration 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Gently slide the drive into the uppermost available bay until it snaps into place. When the drive is  
properly inserted, the drivelock will secure it. Repeat this step for each drive.  
CAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The  
bottom bay supports a half-height drive or other device that is no more than 14.5 cm (5.7 inches)  
in depth. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This could  
cause damage to the drive and the system board. The use of unnecessary force when installing  
any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.  
8. Reconnect all power and data cables to the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.  
9. Remove the bezel subpanel as described in the Bezel Blanks on page 66 section.  
CAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when you pull it away from the front bezel. Pulling the  
subpanel away at an angle could damage the pins that align it within the front bezel.  
10. Reposition the bezel blanks within the subpanel in the proper orientation for the desktop  
configuration.  
11. Reposition the subpanel (rotate it 90º) with the logo at the bottom, then snap it back into the bezel.  
106 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Removal and Replacement Procedures  
Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.  
After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics utility to verify  
that all components operate properly.  
NOTE: Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.  
Preparation for Disassembly  
procedures.  
1. Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer (Unlocking the Smart  
2. Close any open software applications.  
3. Exit the operating system.  
4. Remove any diskette, compact disc. or media card from the computer.  
5. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.  
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.  
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as the  
system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the  
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be disconnected  
before servicing a unit.  
6. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.  
7. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.  
NOTE: During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing.  
Keep all screws with the units removed.  
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the  
wrong screw in an application may damage the unit.  
Preparation for Disassembly 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock  
NOTE: The Smart Cover Lock is an optional feature included on some models only.  
The Smart Cover Lock is a software-controllable cover lock, controlled by the setup password. This lock  
prevents unauthorized access to the internal components. The computer ships with the Smart Cover  
Lock in the unlocked position. For more information about locking the Smart Cover Lock, refer to the  
Desktop Management Guide.  
Smart Cover FailSafe Key  
If you enable the Smart Cover Lock and cannot enter your password to disable the lock, you will need  
a Smart Cover FailSafe Key to open the computer cover. You will need the key to access the internal  
computer components in any of the following circumstances:  
Power outage  
Startup failure  
PC component (for example, processor or power supply) failure  
Forgotten password  
NOTE: The Smart Cover FailSafe Key is a specialized tool available from HP. Be prepared; order this  
key before you need one.  
To obtain a FailSafe Key:  
Contact an authorized HP reseller or service provider. Order PN 166527-001 for the wrench-style  
key or PN 166527-002 for the screwdriver bit key.  
Refer to the HP Web site (http://www.hp.com) for ordering information.  
Call the appropriate number listed in the warranty or in the Support Telephone Numbers guide.  
108 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key to Remove the Smart Cover Lock  
To open the access panel with the Smart Cover Lock engaged:  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Use the Smart Cover FailSafe Key to remove the tamper-proof screw that secures the Smart Cover  
Lock to the chassis.  
3. Remove the access panel.  
To reattach the Smart Cover Lock, secure the lock in place with the tamper-proof screw.  
Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
External Security Devices  
The following security devices are used to prevent unauthorized access to the internal components of  
the computer and/or secure the computer to a fixed object.  
Installing a Security Lock  
The security locks displayed below and on the following page can be used to secure the computer.  
Cable Lock  
Padlock  
110 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
HP Business PC Security Lock  
1. Fasten the security cable by looping it around a stationary object.  
2. Thread the keyboard and mouse cables through the lock.  
External Security Devices 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Screw the lock to the chassis using the screw provided.  
4. Insert the plug end of the security cable into the lock (1) and push the button in (2) to engage the  
lock. Use the key provided to disengage the lock.  
112 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Computer Access Panel  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Press the buttons on the left and right sides of the computer (1), slide the access panel back until  
it stops, and then lift it up and off the chassis (2).  
To install the access panel, reverse the removal procedure.  
Computer Access Panel 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front Bezel  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Lift up the green latch behind the upper right side of the bezel (1), pull the right side of the bezel  
off the chassis (2), and then remove the bezel from the chassis.  
To replace the front bezel, reverse the removal procedures.  
114 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bezel Blanks  
On some models, there are bezel blanks covering the 3.5-inch and 5.25-inch external drive bays that  
need to be removed before installing a drive. To remove a bezel blank:  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 114).  
4. To remove the 3.5-inch bezel blank, push the two retaining tabs that hold the bezel blank in place  
towards the outer right edge of the bezel (1) and slide the bezel blank to the right to remove it (2).  
5. To remove the 5.25-inch bezel blank, push the two retaining tabs that hold the bezel blank in place  
towards the outer left edge of the bezel (1) and pull the bezel blank inwards to remove it (2).  
6. Replace the front bezel.  
Bezel Blanks 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing Additional Memory  
The computer comes with double data rate 2 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR2-  
SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).  
DIMMs  
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to four industry-standard DIMMs.  
These memory sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled DIMM. To achieve the maximum  
memory support, you can populate the system board with up to 8 GB of memory configured in a high-  
performing dual channel mode.  
DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs  
For proper system operation, the DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs must be:  
industry-standard 240-pin  
unbuffered PC2-5300 667 MHz-compliant or PC2-6400 800 MHz-compliant  
1.8 volt DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs  
The DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs must also:  
support CAS latency 5 DDR2 667 Mhz (5-5-5 timing), CAS latency 5 DDR2 800 Mhz (5-5-5 timing),  
and CAS latency 6 DDR2 800 Mhz (6-6-6 timing)  
contain the mandatory JEDEC SPD information  
In addition, the computer supports:  
512Mbit and 1Gbit non-ECC memory technologies  
single-sided and double-sided DIMMs  
DIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 DDR devices; DIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM are not  
supported  
NOTE: The system will not operate properly if you install unsupported DIMMs.  
116 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Populating DIMM Sockets  
There are four DIMM sockets on the system board, with two sockets per channel. The sockets are  
labeled DIMM1, DIMM2, DIMM3, and DIMM4. Sockets DIMM1 and DIMM2 operate in memory channel  
A. Sockets DIMM3 and DIMM4 operate in memory channel B.  
Item  
Description  
Socket Color  
1
2
3
4
DIMM1 socket, Channel A  
DIMM2 socket, Channel A  
DIMM3 socket, Channel B  
DIMM4 socket, Channel B  
Black  
White  
White  
White  
NOTE: A DIMM must occupy the black DIMM1 socket. Otherwise, the system  
will display a POST error message indicating that a memory module must be  
installed in the black socket.  
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,  
depending on how the DIMMs are installed.  
The system will operate in single channel mode if the DIMM sockets are populated in one channel  
only.  
The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the total memory capacity of  
the DIMMs in Channel A is equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. The  
technology and device width can vary between the channels. For example, if Channel A is  
populated with two 512-MB DIMMs and Channel B is populated with one 1GB DIMM, the system  
will operate in dual channel mode.  
The system will operate in flex mode if the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel A is not  
equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. In flex mode, the channel populated  
with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory assigned to dual channel  
and the remainder is assigned to single channel. For optimal speed, the channels should be  
balanced so that the largest amount of memory is spread between the two channels. If one channel  
will have more memory than the other, the larger amount should be assigned to Channel A. For  
example, if you are populating the sockets with one 1-GB DIMM, and three 512-MB DIMMs,  
Channel A should be populated with the 1-GB DIMM and one 512-MB DIMM, and Channel B should  
Installing Additional Memory 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
be populated with the two 512-MB DIMMs. With this configuration, 2-GB will run as dual channel  
and 512-MB will run as single channel.  
In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest DIMM in the system.  
Installing DIMMs  
CAUTION: You must disconnect the power cord before adding or removing memory modules.  
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always supplied to the memory modules as long as the  
computer is plugged into an active AC outlet. Adding or removing memory modules while voltage is  
present may cause irreparable damage to the memory modules or system board.  
The memory module sockets have gold-plated metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is  
important to use memory modules with gold-plated metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or oxidation  
resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.  
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards. Before  
beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching a  
grounded metal object. For more information, refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 53.  
When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so may damage  
the module.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Locate the memory module sockets on the system board.  
WARNING! To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system  
components to cool before touching.  
118 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Open both latches of the memory module socket (1), and insert the memory module into the socket  
(2).  
NOTE: A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with  
the tab on the memory socket.  
A DIMM must occupy the black DIMM1 socket.  
For maximum performance, populate the sockets so that the memory capacity is spread as equally  
as possible between Channel A and Channel B.  
5. Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and properly  
seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position (3).  
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to install any additional modules.  
7. Replace the access panel.  
8. If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.  
9. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.  
10. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.  
The computer should automatically recognize the additional memory the next time you turn on the  
computer.  
Installing Additional Memory 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Expansion Cards  
The computer has one standard low-profile PCI expansion slot that can accommodate an expansion  
card up to 17.46 cm (6.875 inches) in length. The computer also has two PCI Express x1 expansion  
slots and one PCI Express x16 expansion slot.  
NOTE: The PCI and PCI Express slots support only low profile cards. An optional riser is available  
from HP that will support two full-height PCI cards. If the riser is installed, the PCI Express expansion  
slots are inaccessible.  
Item  
Description  
1
2
3
4
PCI expansion slot  
PCI Express x1 expansion slot  
PCI Express x16 expansion slot  
PCI Express x1 expansion slot  
NOTE: You can install a PCI Express x1, x4, x8, or x16 expansion card in the PCI Express x16  
expansion slot.  
To install an expansion card:  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Locate the correct vacant expansion socket on the system board and the corresponding expansion  
slot on the back of the computer chassis.  
120 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Release the slot cover retention latch that secures the PCI slot covers by lifting the green tab on  
the latch and rotating the latch to the open position.  
5. Before installing an expansion card, remove the expansion slot cover or the existing expansion  
card.  
NOTE: Before removing an installed expansion card, disconnect any cables that may be attached  
to the expansion card.  
a. If you are installing an expansion card in a vacant socket, remove the appropriate expansion  
slot cover on the back of the chassis. Pull the slot cover straight up then away from the inside  
of the chassis.  
Expansion Cards 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
b. If you are removing a standard PCI card, hold the card at each end, and carefully rock it back  
and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket. Pull the expansion card straight up  
from the socket then away from the inside of the chassis to release it from the chassis frame.  
Be sure not to scrape the card against the other components.  
c. If you are removing a PCI Express x16 card, pull the retention arm on the back of the expansion  
socket away from the card and carefully rock the card back and forth until the connectors pull  
free from the socket. Pull the expansion card straight up from the socket then away from the  
inside of the chassis to release it from the chassis frame. Be sure not to scrape the card against  
the other components.  
6. Store the removed card in anti-static packaging.  
7. If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the open  
slot.  
122 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or expansion  
slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.  
8. To install a new expansion card, slide the card under the slot cover retention latch and press the  
card down into the socket on the system board.  
NOTE: When installing an expansion card, press firmly on the card so that the whole connector  
seats properly in the expansion card slot.  
9. Rotate the slot cover retention latch back in place to secure the expansion card.  
10. Connect external cables to the installed card, if needed. Connect internal cables to the system  
board, if needed.  
11. Replace the access panel.  
12. If necessary, reconfigure the computer. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide for  
instructions on using Computer Setup.  
Expansion Cards 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cable Management  
The Small Form Factor chassis is a very compact computer and proper routing of the internal cables is  
critical to the operation of the computer. Follow good cable management practices when working inside  
the computer.  
Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heatsink.  
Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like these  
are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.  
Keep cables clear of movable or rotating parts like the power supply and drive cage to prevent  
them from being cut or crimped when the component is lowered into its normal position.  
When folding a flat ribbon cable, never fold to a sharp crease. Sharp creases may damage the  
wires.  
Some flat ribbon cables come prefolded. Never change the folds on these cables.  
Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.  
Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.  
Never crease a SATA data cable.  
Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push cables  
down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.  
When removing the power supply power cables from the P1 connector on the system board, always  
follow these steps:  
1. Squeeze on the top of the retaining latch attached to the cable end of the connector (1).  
2. Grasp the cable end of the connector and pull it straight up (2).  
CAUTION: Always pull the connector - NEVER pull on the cable. Pulling on the cable could  
damage the cable and result in a failed power supply.  
124 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cable Connections  
System board connectors are color-coded to make it easier to find the proper connection.  
Cable  
To  
Cable Designator  
Power Supply  
Power Supply  
Power Supply  
Power Supply  
Power Supply  
Power Supply  
System board, 24-pin  
Diskette drive  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
P5  
P7  
CPU power, 6-pin  
1st SATA hard drive  
2nd SATA hard drive  
Optical drive  
Cable  
To  
PCA Designator  
Diskette drive  
System board  
System board  
P10, FLOPPY (Black)  
P60, SATA 0 (Dark Blue)  
P61, SATA 1 (White)  
P62, SATA 4 (Light blue)  
P54, COMA  
1st SATA hard drive  
1st ODD or 2nd HDD if no ODD present System board  
2nd SATA HDD if ODD present  
Serial port A  
System board  
System board  
System board  
System board  
System board  
System board  
System board  
System board  
System board  
System board  
System board  
System board  
Serial port B  
P52, COMB  
Hood lock solenoid  
Heatsink fan  
P124, HLOCK  
P8, CPUFAN1  
Hood Sensor  
P125, HSENSE  
Front power button/LED  
Front I/O USB  
P5, PB/LED  
P24, FRONT USB (Yellow)  
P6, SPKR  
Speaker  
Front audio  
P23, FRONT AUD, (Blue)  
P9, CHFAN  
Chassis fan  
Media card reader  
P150, MEDIA  
Cable Connections 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Drives  
A Torx T-15 screwdriver is needed to remove and install the guide screws on a drive.  
CAUTION: Make sure personal files on the hard drive are backed up to an external storage device  
before removing the hard drive. Failure to do so will result in data loss. After replacing the primary hard  
drive, you will need to run the Restore Plus! CD to load the HP factory-installed files.  
Drive Positions  
1
3.5-inch internal hard drive bay  
2
3
5.25-inch external drive bay for optional drives (optical drive shown)  
3.5-inch external drive bay for optional drives (media card reader shown)  
NOTE: The 3.5-inch external drive bay can also be configured with a secondary  
internal hard drive covered by a bezel blank.  
To verify the type, size, and capacity of the storage devices installed in the computer, run Computer  
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide for more information.  
126 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installing and Removing Drives  
When installing additional drives, follow these guidelines:  
The primary Serial ATA (SATA) hard drive must be connected to the dark blue primary SATA  
connector on the system board labeled SATA0.  
Connect a SATA optical drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled SATA1.  
Connect a second SATA hard drive to the next available (unpopulated) SATA connector on the  
system board by following the numbered sequence of the connectors.  
Always populate the dark blue SATA0 and white SATA1 connectors before the light blue SATA4  
connector.  
Connect a diskette drive to the connector labeled FLOPPY.  
Connect a media card reader to the USB connector labeled MEDIA.  
The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) optical drives or PATA hard drives.  
You must install guide screws to ensure the drive will line up correctly in the drive cage and lock  
in place. HP has provided extra guide screws for the external drive bays (four 6-32 standard screws  
and four M3 metric screws), installed in the front of the chassis, under the front bezel. The 6-32  
standard screws are required for a secondary hard drive. All other drives (except the primary hard  
drive) use M3 metric screws. The HP-supplied metric screws are black and the HP-supplied  
standard screws are silver. If you are replacing the primary hard drive, you must remove the four  
silver and blue 6-32 isolation mounting guide screws from the old hard drive and install them in the  
new hard drive.  
Drives 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:  
If you are inserting or removing a drive, shut down the operating system properly, turn off the computer,  
and unplug the power cord.  
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive, avoid  
touching the connector. For more information about preventing electrostatic damage, refer to  
Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.  
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.  
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields  
such as monitors or speakers.  
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other protective packaging and label  
the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”  
128 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Board Drive Connections  
Refer to the following illustration and table to identify the system board drive connectors.  
No.  
System Board Connector  
System Board Label  
Color  
1
2
3
4
5
Media Card Reader  
Diskette Drive  
SATA0  
MEDIA  
FLOPPY  
SATA0  
SATA1  
SATA4  
black  
black  
dark blue  
white  
SATA1  
SATA4  
light blue  
Drives 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing an Optical Drive  
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of a drive before removing the drive from the  
computer.  
NOTE: An optical drive is a DVD-ROM or SuperMulti LightScribe drive.  
To remove an optical drive:  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.  
4. Disconnect the power cable (1) and data cable (2) from the rear of the optical drive.  
130 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Rotate the drive cage back down to its normal position.  
CAUTION: Be careful not to pinch any cables or wires when rotating the drive cage down.  
6. Press the green drive retainer latch (1) located on the right side of the drive to disengage the drive  
from the drive cage. While pressing the drive retainer latch, slide the drive back until it stops, and  
then lift it up and out of the drive cage (2).  
To replace the optical drive, reverse the removal procedure.  
NOTE: When replacing a drive, transfer the four guide screws from the old drive to the new one.  
Installing an Optical Drive into the 5.25-inch Drive Bay  
To install an optional 5.25-inch optical drive:  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
Drives 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. If you are installing a drive in a bay covered by a bezel blank, remove the front bezel then remove  
the bezel blank. See Bezel Blanks on page 115 for more information.  
4. Install two M3 metric guide screws in the lower holes on each side of the drive. HP has provided  
four extra M3 metric guide screws on the front of the chassis, under the front bezel. The M3 metric  
guide screws are black. Refer to Installing and Removing Drives on page 127 for an illustration of  
the extra M3 metric guide screws location.  
CAUTION: Use only 5-mm long screws as guide screws. Longer screws can damage the internal  
components of the drive.  
NOTE: When replacing the drive, transfer the four M3 metric guide screws from the old drive to  
the new one.  
5. Position the guide screws on the drive into the J-slots in the drive bay. Then slide the drive toward  
the front of the computer until it locks into place.  
132 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.  
7. Connect the SATA data cable to the white system board connector labeled SATA1.  
8. Route the data cable through the cable guides.  
CAUTION: There are two cable guides that keep the data cable from being pinched by the drive  
cage when raising or lowering it. One is located on the bottom side of the drive cage. The other is  
located on the chassis frame under the drive cage. Route the data cable through these guides  
before connecting it to the optical drive.  
9. Connect the power cable (1) and data cable (2) to the rear of the optical drive.  
Drives 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Rotate the drive cage back down to its normal position.  
CAUTION: Be careful not to pinch any cables or wires when rotating the drive cage down.  
The system automatically recognizes the drive and reconfigures the computer.  
Removing an External 3.5-inch Drive  
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of a drive before removing the drive from the  
computer.  
NOTE: The 3.5-inch drive bay may contain a diskette drive or a media card reader.  
The 3.5-inch drive is located underneath the optical drive. You must remove the optical drive before  
removing the external 3.5-inch drive.  
1. Follow the procedure in Removing an Optical Drive on page 130 to remove the optical drive and  
access the 3.5-inch drive.  
134 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Disconnect the drive cables, as indicated in the following illustrations:  
a. If you are removing a diskette drive, disconnect the data cable (1) and power cable (2) from  
the back of the drive.  
b. If you are removing a media card reader, disconnect the USB cable from the system board.  
Drives 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Press the green drive retainer latch (1) located on the right side of the drive to disengage the drive  
from the drive cage. While pressing the drive retainer latch, slide the drive back until it stops, then  
lift it up and out of the drive cage (2).  
NOTE: To replace the 3.5-inch drive, reverse the removal procedure.  
When replacing a 3.5-inch drive, transfer the four guide screws from the old drive to the new one.  
Installing a Drive into the 3.5-inch External Drive Bay  
Depending on the computer configuration, the 3.5-inch external drive bay on the front of the computer  
may be configured with a media card reader or a diskette drive, or it may be an empty drive bay.  
If the computer was not configured with a 3.5-inch drive, you can install a media card reader, diskette  
drive, or hard drive into the drive bay.  
The 3.5-inch bay is located underneath the optical drive. To install a drive into the 3.5-inch bay:  
NOTE: Install guide screws to ensure the drive will line up correctly in the drive cage and lock in place.  
HP has provided extra guide screws for the external drive bays (four 6-32 standard screws and four M3  
metric screws), installed in the front of the chassis, under the front bezel. A secondary hard drive uses  
6-32 standard screws. All other drives (except the primary hard drive) use M3 metric screws. The HP-  
supplied M3 metric screws are black and the HP-supplied 6-32 standard screws are silver. Refer to  
Installing and Removing Drives on page 127 for illustrations of the guide screw locations.  
1. Follow the procedure in Removing an Optical Drive on page 130 to remove the optical drive and  
access the 3.5-inch drive bay.  
2. If you are installing a diskette drive or media card reader in a bay covered by a bezel blank, remove  
the front bezel then remove the bezel blank. See Bezel Blanks on page 115 for more information.  
136 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Position the guide screws on the drive into the J-slots in the drive bay. Then slide the drive toward  
the front of the computer until it locks into place.  
4. Connect the appropriate drive cables:  
a. If installing a diskette drive, connect the power and data cables to the rear of the drive and  
connect the other end of the data cable to the connector on the system board labeled FLOPPY.  
b. If installing a second hard drive, connect the power and data cables to the rear of the drive  
and connect the other end of the data cable to the next available (unpopulated) SATA  
connector on the system board by following the numbered sequence of the connectors.  
c. If installing a media card reader, connect the USB cable from the media card reader to the  
USB connector on the system board labeled MEDIA.  
Drives 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Primary 3.5-inch Internal SATA Hard Drive  
NOTE: The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) hard drives.  
The preinstalled 3.5-inch hard drive is located under the power supply. To remove and replace the hard  
drive:  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.  
4. Rotate the power supply to its upright position. The hard drive is located beneath the power supply.  
CAUTION: If the computer has a Smart Cover Lock installed next to the drive cage, carefully  
route all cables around the Smart Cover Lock assembly as you raise the power supply to avoid  
damage to the cables or lock.  
138 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Disconnect the power cable (1) and data cable (2) from the back of the hard drive.  
6. Press down on the green release latch next to the hard drive (1). While holding the latch down,  
slide the drive toward the front of the chassis until it stops, and then lift the drive up and out of the  
bay (2).  
NOTE: To install a hard drive, transfer the silver and blue isolation mounting guide screws from the  
old hard drive to the new hard drive.  
When replacing the primary hard drive, be sure to route the SATA and power cables through the cable  
guide on the bottom of the chassis frame behind the hard drive.  
If the system has only one SATA hard drive, the data cable must be connected to the dark blue connector  
labeled SATA0 on the system board to avoid any hard drive performance problems. If you are adding  
a second hard drive, connect the other end of the data cable to the next available (unpopulated) SATA  
connector on the system board by following the numbered sequence of the connectors.  
Drives 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removable 3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive  
Some models are equipped with a Removable SATA Hard Drive Enclosure in the 5.25-inch external  
drive bay. The hard drive is housed in a carrier that can be quickly and easily removed from the drive  
bay. To remove and replace a drive in the carrier:  
1. Unlock the hard drive carrier with the key provided and slide the carrier out of the enclosure.  
2. Remove the screw from the rear of the carrier (1) and slide the top cover off the carrier (2).  
3. Remove the adhesive strip that secures the thermal sensor to the top of the hard drive (1) and  
move the thermal sensor away from the carrier (2).  
140 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Remove the four screws from the bottom of the hard drive carrier.  
5. Slide the hard drive back to disconnect it from the carrier then lift it up and out of the carrier.  
Drives 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Place the new hard drive in the carrier then slide the hard drive back so that it seats in the SATA  
connector on the carrier's circuit board. Be sure the connector on the hard drive is pressed all the  
way into the connector on the carrier's circuit board.  
7. Replace the four screws in the bottom of the carrier to hold the drive securely in place.  
142 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Place the thermal sensor on top of the hard drive in a position that does not cover the label (1) and  
attach the thermal sensor to the top of the hard drive with the adhesive strip (2).  
9. Slide the cover on the carrier (1) and replace the screw on the rear of the carrier to secure the cover  
in place (2).  
10. Slide the hard drive carrier into the enclosure on the computer and lock it with the key provided.  
NOTE: The carrier must be locked for power to be supplied to the hard drive.  
Drives 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ReadyBoost Card  
A ReadyBoost card is installed in the computer. The card is secured to the chassis, and a cable connects  
the card to the system board.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Unplug the ReadyBoost cable from the system board, and then lift the card assembly from the  
chassis.  
To install the ReadyBoost card, reverse the removal procedure.  
144 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fan Shroud  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Lift the fan shroud straight up out of the chassis.  
To install the fan shroud, reverse the removal procedure.  
Fan Shroud 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chassis Fan  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 114).  
4. Remove the fan shroud (Fan Shroud on page 145).  
5. Disconnect the fan cable from the system board.  
6. Remove the two screws that secure the fan to the chassis (1), slide the fan to the right, tilt the fan  
so it clears the top of the chassis (2), and then lift the fan out of the chassis (3).  
To install the chassis fan, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow into the unit.  
146 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Switch Assembly  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 114).  
4. Remove the chassis fan (Chassis Fan on page 146).  
5. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.  
6. Disconnect the power switch/LED cable from the system board.  
7. Squeeze the switch holder retaining clips together at the front of the chassis (1) and push the switch  
assembly into the chassis (2).  
8. Push the two LEDs into the chassis (3).  
9. Remove the assembly from the chassis.  
To install the power switch and LEDs, reverse the removal procedure.  
When installing the left LED, reach through the slot left open by the rotated drive cage to gain access  
to the hole for the LED.  
When installing the power switch, you may need to first insert one clip and the power button, then use  
a flat-blade screwdriver to help guide the other clip into its slot.  
Power Switch Assembly 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front I/O Device  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 114).  
4. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.  
5. Disconnect the two front I/O cables from the system board.  
6. Remove the screw that secures the front I/O device to the chassis (1).  
7. Pull the device from the chassis and guide the cables through the hole to remove them from the  
chassis (2).  
To reinstall the front I/O device, reverse the removal procedure.  
148 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Heatsink  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Remove the fan shroud (Fan Shroud on page 145).  
4. Disconnect the heatsink fan control cable from the system board.  
5. Loosen the four captive screws that secure the heatsink to the system board tray (1).  
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an  
X) to even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the  
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.  
6. Lift the heatsink from atop the processor (2) and set it on its side to keep from contaminating the  
work area with thermal grease.  
When reinstalling the heatsink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe and  
fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.  
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to  
evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are  
very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.  
Failure to install the fan shroud may cause the computer to overheat.  
Heatsink 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Processor  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Remove the fan shroud (Fan Shroud on page 145).  
4. Remove the heatsink (Heatsink on page 149).  
5. Rotate the locking lever to its full open position (1).  
6. Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position (2).  
7. Carefully lift the processor from the socket (3).  
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and  
handling them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to  
replace the system board.  
The heatsink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage to the  
processor’s solder connections.  
To install a new processor:  
1. Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.  
2. Secure the locking lever. If reusing the existing heatsink, go to step 3. If using a new heatsink, go  
to step 6.  
3. If reusing the existing heatsink, clean the bottom of the heatsink with the alcohol pad provided in  
the spares kit.  
CAUTION: Before reinstalling the heatsink you must clean the top of the processor and the  
bottom of the heatsink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has  
evaporated, apply thermal grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares  
kit.  
150 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor and install the  
heatsink atop the processor.  
5. Go to step 7.  
6. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and place  
it in position atop the processor.  
7. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the four captive screws and  
attach the heatsink control cable to the system board.  
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an  
X) to evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the  
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.  
NOTE: After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to  
ensure that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can  
be found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.  
Speaker  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 114).  
4. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.  
5. Disconnect the speaker wire from the system board.  
6. Remove the two screws that secure the speaker to the chassis (1).  
7. Lift the speaker up and out of the chassis (2).  
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.  
Speaker 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Power Supply  
WARNING! Voltage is always present on the system board when the computer is plugged into an  
active AC outlet. To avoid possible personal injury and damage to the equipment the power cord should  
be disconnected from the computer and/or the AC outlet before opening the computer.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Rotate the drive cage up and disconnect the power cables from all of the drives.  
4. Disconnect the power cables from the system board.  
5. Release the power supply cables from the cable retaining clips on the bottom of the chassis and  
under the drive cage.  
6. Rotate the power supply to its full upright position (1), pull the power supply forward (2), and then  
lift the power supply straight up and out of the chassis (3).  
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.  
CAUTION: When installing the power supply cables, make sure they are properly positioned so they  
are not cut by the drive cage and are not pinched by the rotating power supply.  
152 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Board  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
3. Remove all PCI and PCI Express expansion boards (Expansion Cards on page 120).  
4. Remove the fan shroud from the chassis (Fan Shroud on page 145).  
5. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.  
6. Rotate the power supply to its full upright position.  
7. Disconnect all data and power cables from the system board.  
System Board 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Disconnect the serial port from the system board.  
9. Disconnect the balance of the cables from the system board.  
10. Remove the heatsink (Heatsink on page 149).  
11. Remove the eight screws that secure the system board to the chassis (1).  
12. Lift up the front of the system board (2), and then pull the system board forward, up, and out of the  
chassis (3).  
To install the system board, reverse the removal procedure.  
NOTE: When replacing the system board, you must also change the chassis serial number in the  
BIOS.  
NOTE: The heatsink should be installed on the system board before the system board is reinstalled  
in the chassis.  
154 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION: Before reinstalling the heatsink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom of  
the heatsink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply  
thermal grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares kit.  
CAUTION: When reconnecting the cables it is important that they be positioned so they do not interfere  
with the rotation of the drive cage or power supply.  
Backwall  
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock (Unlocking the  
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
3. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
4. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.  
5. Remove the power supply (Power Supply on page 152).  
6. If necessary, remove the SmartCover lock from the backwall of the chassis using the special  
security wrench and disconnect its cable from the system board (Unlocking the Smart Cover  
7. Remove the system board (System Board on page 153).  
Backwall 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8. Remove the four screws that secure the backwall assembly to the chassis (1), slide the backwall  
assembly toward the front of the chassis (2), and then lift it out of the chassis (3).  
To replace the backwall, reverse the removal procedures.  
Battery  
The battery that comes with your computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a lifetime of  
about three years. When replacing the battery, use a battery equivalent to the battery originally installed  
on the computer. The computer comes with a 3-volt lithium coin cell battery.  
NOTE: The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC wall  
socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.  
WARNING! This computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of  
fire and burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:  
Do not attempt to recharge the battery.  
Do not expose to temperatures higher than 140°F (60°C).  
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water.  
Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.  
CAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings. When  
the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared. Refer to the Computer Setup  
(F10) Utility Guide for information on backing up the CMOS settings.  
NOTE: HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges,  
and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/  
156 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional  
equipment. Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by  
briefly touching a grounded metal object.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 107).  
2. Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 113).  
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove an expansion card to gain access to the battery.  
3. Locate the battery and battery holder on the system board.  
4. Depending on the type of battery holder on your system board, complete the following instructions  
to replace the battery:  
Type 1 Battery Holder  
1. Lift the battery out of its holder.  
2. Slide the replacement battery into position, positive side up.  
3. The battery holder automatically secures the battery in the proper position.  
4. Replace the computer access panel.  
5. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.  
6. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer Setup.  
Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.  
Type 2 Battery Holder  
1. To release the battery from its holder, squeeze the metal clamp that extends above one edge of  
the battery. When the battery pops up, lift it out (1).  
Battery 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. To insert the new battery, slide one edge of the replacement battery under the holder’s lip with the  
positive side up (2). Push the other edge down until the clamp snaps over the other edge of the  
battery.  
3. Replace the computer access panel.  
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.  
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer Setup.  
Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.  
Type 3 Battery Holder  
1. Pull back on the clip (1) that holds the battery in place, then remove the battery (2).  
2. Insert the new battery and position the clip back in place.  
3. Replace the computer access panel.  
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.  
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer Setup.  
Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.  
158 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9 Removal and Replacement Procedures  
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.  
After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics utility to verify  
that all components operate properly.  
NOTE: Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.  
Preparation for Disassembly  
procedures.  
1. Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer (External Security  
2. Close any open software applications.  
3. Exit the operating system.  
4. Remove any compact disc from the computer.  
5. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.  
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.  
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as the  
system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the  
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be disconnected  
before servicing a unit.  
6. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.  
7. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.  
NOTE: During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing.  
Keep all screws with the units removed.  
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the  
wrong screw in an application may damage the unit.  
8. If the PC is mounted in the accessory mounting stand, remove it from the stand.  
Preparation for Disassembly 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
External Security Devices  
The following security devices are used to prevent unauthorized access to the internal components of  
the computer and/or secure the computer to a fixed object.  
Cable Lock  
There are two cable lock slots on the rear of the computer. The slot next to the thumbscrew should be  
used when there is no port cover. The slot on the far right should be used when a port cover is installed.  
160 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
HP Business PC Security Lock  
1. Fasten the security cable by looping it around a stationary object.  
2. Thread the keyboard and mouse cables through the lock.  
External Security Devices 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Screw the lock to the chassis using the screw provided.  
4. Insert the plug end of the security cable into the lock (1) and push the button in (2) to engage the  
lock. Use the key provided to disengage the lock.  
162 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Computer Access Panel  
To access internal components, you must remove the access panel:  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Loosen the thumbscrew on the rear of the computer (1), slide the access panel toward the front of  
the computer, and then lift it off (2).  
To replace the computer access panel, reverse the removal procedures.  
Computer Access Panel 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front Bezel  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Lift the fan up and place it on top of the optical drive to access the front bezel release tabs. You  
do not need to disconnect the fan cable from the system board.  
4. Press the two release tabs on the inside of the bezel towards the right side of the computer (1),  
and then rotate the bezel off from right to left (2).  
To replace the bezel, reverse the removal procedures.  
164 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bezel Blanks  
On some models, there is a bezel blank covering the external drive bay that needs to be removed before  
installing a drive. To remove a bezel blank:  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 164).  
4. Push the two retaining tabs that hold the bezel blank in place towards the outer right edge of the  
bezel (1), and then pull the bezel blank inward to remove it (2).  
Bezel Blanks 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Memory  
The computer comes with double data rate 2 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR2-  
SDRAM) small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMMs).  
SODIMMs  
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to two industry-standard SODIMMs.  
These memory sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled SODIMM. To achieve the maximum  
memory support, you can populate the system board with up to 4 GB of memory.  
DDR2-SDRAM SODIMMs  
For proper system operation, the SODIMMs must be:  
industry-standard 200-pin  
unbuffered PC2-5300 667 MHz-compliant or PC2-6400 800 MHz-compliant  
1.8 volt DDR2-SDRAM SODIMMs  
The DDR2-SDRAM SODIMMs must also:  
support CAS latency 5 DDR2 667 MHz (5-5-5 timing) and CAS latency 6 DDR2 800 MHz (6-6-6  
timing)  
contain the mandatory Joint Electronic Device Engineering Council (JEDEC) specification  
In addition, the computer supports:  
512Mbit and 1Gbit non-ECC memory technologies  
single-sided and double-sided SODIMMs  
SODIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 devices; SODIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM are not  
supported  
NOTE: The system will not operate properly if you install unsupported SODIMMs.  
Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide for information on how to determine the processor bus  
frequency of a specific computer.  
166 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Populating SODIMM Sockets  
Item  
Description  
Socket Color  
1
2
SODIMM1 socket, Channel A  
SODIMM3 socket, Channel B  
Black  
White  
NOTE: A SODIMM must occupy the black DIMM1 socket. Otherwise, the  
system will display a POST error message indicating that a memory module  
must be installed in the black socket.  
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,  
depending on how the SODIMMs are installed.  
The system will operate in single channel mode if the SODIMM sockets are populated in one  
channel only.  
The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the memory capacity of the  
SODIMM in Channel A is equal to the memory capacity of the SODIMM in Channel B.  
The system will operate in flex mode if the memory capacity of the SODIMM in Channel A is not  
equal to the memory capacity of the SODIMM in Channel B. In flex mode, the channel populated  
with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory assigned to dual channel  
and the remainder is assigned to single channel. If one channel will have more memory than the  
other, the larger amount should be assigned to channel A.  
In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest SODIMM in the system.  
Installing SODIMMs  
CAUTION: You must disconnect the power cord before adding or removing memory modules.  
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always supplied to the memory modules as long as the  
computer is plugged into an active AC outlet. Adding or removing memory modules while voltage is  
present may cause irreparable damage to the memory modules or system board.  
The memory module sockets have gold-plated metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is  
important to use memory modules with gold-plated metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or oxidation  
resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.  
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards. Before  
beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching a  
grounded metal object. For more information, refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 53.  
When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so may damage  
the module.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Locate the memory module sockets on the system board.  
WARNING! To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system  
components to cool before touching.  
Memory 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. If you are adding a second SODIMM, remove the SODIMM from the top DIMM1 socket to access  
the bottom DIMM3 socket. Press outward on the two latches on each side of the SODIMM (1) then  
pull the SODIMM out of the socket (2).  
5. Slide the new SODIMM into the socket at approximately a 30° angle (1) then press the SODIMM  
down (2) so that the latches lock it in place.  
NOTE: A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with  
the tab on the memory socket.  
A SODIMM must occupy the DIMM1 (top) socket.  
6. Replace the SODIMM in the DIMM1 socket if it was removed.  
The computer automatically recognizes the additional memory when you turn on the computer.  
168 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cable Management  
Always follow good cable management practices when working inside the computer.  
Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heatsink.  
Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like these  
are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.  
Keep cables clear of sliding or moveable parts to prevent their being cut or crimped when the parts  
are moved.  
Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.  
Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.  
Never crease a SATA data cable.  
Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push cables  
down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.  
When removing the power supply power cables from the P1 or P3 connectors on the system board,  
always follow these steps:  
1. Squeeze on the top of the retaining latch attached to the cable end of the connector (1).  
2. Grasp the cable end of the connector and pull it straight up (2).  
CAUTION: Always pull the connector - NEVER pull on the cable. Pulling on the cable could  
damage the cable and result in a failed power supply.  
Cable Management 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cable Connections  
System board connectors are color-coded to make it easier to find the proper connection.  
System Board Connections  
System Board Connector  
Description  
Optical data/power  
Front Chassis fan  
Rear chassis fan  
Speaker  
P21, SECONDARY  
P8, CHFAN1  
P9, CHFAN2  
P6, SPKR  
Hood sensor  
P125, HSENSE  
Optical Drive  
An optical drive is a DVD-ROM drive, a DVD/CD-RW Combo drive, or a SuperMulti LightScribe drive.  
Removing the Optical Drive  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Push the green release latch on the right rear side of the optical drive toward the center of the  
optical drive (1), slide the optical drive forward approximately 6 mm (1/4 inch) (2), and then  
disconnect the cable on the rear of the drive (3).  
170 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4. Slide the drive all the way out of the bay through the front bezel.  
Preparing a New Optical Drive  
Before you can use the new optical drive, attach the release latch.  
1. Peel the backing off the adhesive on the release latch.  
2. Without allowing the release latch to touch the optical drive, carefully align the holes on the release  
latch with the pins on the side of the optical drive. Make sure the release latch is oriented properly.  
3. Insert the pin at the front of the optical drive into the hole at the end of the release latch, and press  
firmly.  
4. Insert the second pin, and press the entire release latch firmly to fasten the latch securely to the  
optical drive.  
Optical Drive 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing a New Optical Drive  
NOTE: If you are installing an optical drive in a bay that did not previously have a drive in it, you must  
remove the access panel and the bezel blank covering the opening of the bay before proceeding. Follow  
1. Attach the release latch to the new optical drive. Refer to Preparing a New Optical Drive  
2. Align the optical drive with the opening in the front bezel. Make sure the back of the optical drive  
is being inserted first and the release latch is on the inner side of the drive.  
3. Slide the optical drive into the computer through the front bezel. However, do not slide it all the way  
in until it locks. Leave it approximately 6 mm (1/4 inch) short of the fully-inserted locked position to  
allow room to connect the cable.  
172 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Connect the cable to the rear of the optical drive (1), and then slide the drive the rest of the way  
into the bay so that it locks in place (2).  
Optical Drive Connector  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 170).  
4. Push the top of the connector down through the opening of the hard drive cage until the connector  
is on the opposite side of the hard drive cage opening.  
5. Pull the connector straight up to disconnect it from the system board.  
To install the optical drive connector, reverse the removal procedures.  
Optical Drive Connector 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Hard Drive  
NOTE: The Ultra-Slim Desktop supports only 2.5-inch Serial ATA (SATA) internal hard drives; parallel  
ATA (PATA) internal hard drives are not supported.  
The 2.5-inch hard drive is enclosed in a carrier under the optical drive.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Remove the optical drive. Refer to Removing the Optical Drive on page 170 for instructions.  
4. Press in the release latch on the left side of the hard drive carrier (1) then rotate the carrier handle  
to the right (2).  
5. Lift the hard drive carrier straight up and out of the chassis.  
174 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. To remove the hard drive from the carrier, remove the guide screw from the front left side of the  
carrier.  
7. Slide the carrier back and remove the hard drive.  
Hard Drive 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Transfer the three remaining guide screws (two on the right and one on the rear left) from the old  
drive to the new drive.  
9. Align the guide screws with the slots on the carrier and slide the new hard drive into the carrier (1),  
then replace the guide screw on the front left of the carrier to secure the drive in the carrier (2).  
176 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10. To place the hard drive carrier back in the chassis, align the guide screws with the slots on the  
drive bay, drop the carrier straight down into the drive bay (1), and press the handle on the carrier  
all the way down to the down (2) so that the drive is properly seated and locked in place.  
NOTE: No configuration of the SATA hard drive is necessary; the computer automatically recognizes  
it the next time you turn on the computer.  
Hard Drive 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hard Drive Cage  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 170).  
4. Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 174).  
5. Remove the optical disk drive connector (Optical Drive Connector on page 173).  
6. Remove the screw that secures the cage to the chassis (1), lift the tab on the hard drive cage (2),  
pull the cage toward the rear of the chassis (3), and then lift the cage out of the chassis (4).  
To install the hard drive cage, reverse the removal procedures.  
178 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Cover  
An optional rear port cover is available for the computer.  
To install the port cover:  
1. Thread the cables through the bottom hole on the port cover (1) and connect the cables to the rear  
ports on the computer.  
2. Insert the hooks on the port cover into the slots on the rear of the chassis, then slide the cover to  
the right to secure it in place (2).  
NOTE: For security purposes, you can install an optional cable lock to the chassis that locks the port  
cover and secures the computer. See Cable Lock on page 160.  
The port cover is secured in place by a retention lever just inside the port cover opening. To remove the  
port cover, pull the lever back towards the port cover opening (1), then slide the cover to the left and off  
the computer (2).  
Port Cover 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ReadyBoost Card  
A ReadyBoost card is installed in the computer. The card is secured to the chassis, and a cable connects  
the card to the system board.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Unplug the ReadyBoost cable from the system board, and then lift the card assembly from the  
chassis.  
To install the ReadyBoost card, reverse the removal procedure.  
180 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fan  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Disconnect the fan control cable from the system board.  
4. Lift the fan straight up and out of the chassis.  
To install the fan, reverse the removal procedure.  
Fan 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Speaker  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 164).  
4. Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 174).  
5. Remove the hard drive cage (Hard Drive Cage on page 178).  
6. Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 170).  
7. Disconnect the speaker cable from the system board.  
8. Remove the screws (1) that secure the speaker to the chassis, and then slide the speaker up to  
remove it from the chassis (2).  
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedure.  
182 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
I/O Panel  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Remove the screw from the left side of the panel that holds the I/O panel in place (1).  
4. Press the tab on left side of the panel (2), and then swing the panel toward right to remove it from  
the unit (3).  
To install the I/O panel, reverse the disassembly steps.  
I/O Panel 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Heatsink  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Lift the fan up and place it on top of the optical drive to access the front bezel release tabs. You  
do not need to disconnect the fan cable from the system board.  
4. Unscrew the four screws that secure the heatsink to the system board, and then lift the heatsink  
from the system board.  
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an  
X) to even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the  
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.  
184 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Lay the heatsink on its top in a safe area to prevent the thermal grease from contaminating the  
work surface.  
If reusing the existing heatsink go to step 1.  
If using a new heatsink, go to step 3.  
1. If reusing the existing heatsink, clean bottom of the heatsink and apply the thermal grease provided  
in the spares kit to the top of the processor.  
2. Position the heatsink atop the processor.  
3. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and place  
it in position atop the processor.  
4. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws and  
attach the heatsink control cable and the thermal sensor cable to the system board.  
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an  
X) to evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the  
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.  
Heatsink 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Processor  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Remove the heatsink (Heatsink on page 184).  
4. Rotate the processor locking lever to its full open position (1).  
5. Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position (2).  
6. Carefully lift the processor from the socket (3).  
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and  
handling them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to  
replace the system board.  
The heatsink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage to the  
processor’s solder connections.  
To install a new processor:  
1. Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.  
2. Secure the locking lever.  
If reusing the existing heatsink, go to step 3.  
If using a new heatsink, go to step 5.  
3. If reusing the existing heatsink, clean bottom of the heatsink and apply the thermal grease provided  
in the spares kit to the top of the processor.  
4. Position the heatsink atop the processor.  
186 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and place  
it in position atop the processor.  
6. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws and  
attach the heatsink control cable to the system board.  
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an  
X) to evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the  
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.  
NOTE: After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to  
ensure that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can  
be found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.  
System Board  
CAUTION: Be very careful when removing or replacing the system board to prevent damaging it.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 170).  
4. Remove the memory modules (Memory on page 166).  
5. Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 174).  
6. Remove the hard drive cage (Hard Drive Cage on page 178).  
7. Remove the front I/O panel (I/O Panel on page 183).  
8. Remove the heatsink (Heatsink on page 184).  
9. Disconnect all cables connected to the system board, noting their location for reinstallation.  
10. Remove the five remaining screws that secure the system board to the chassis (1).  
11. Slide system board toward the front of the unit until the rear connectors are clear of their slots in  
the chassis (2).  
System Board 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
12. Lift the rear of the system board until it clears the chassis (3), and then remove the system board  
from the chassis (4).  
To install the system board, reverse the removal procedure.  
NOTE: When replacing the system board, you must also change the chassis serial number in the  
BIOS.  
Rear Chassis Fan  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 170).  
4. Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 174).  
5. Remove the hard drive cage (Hard Drive Cage on page 178).  
6. Remove the heatsink (Heatsink on page 184).  
7. Disconnect the fan cable from the system board.  
8. Remove the system board (System Board on page 187).  
9. Remove the four screws that secure the fan to the chassis (1).  
188 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10. Lift the fan out of the chassis (2).  
To install the fan, reverse the removal procedures.  
Battery  
The battery that comes with your computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a lifetime of  
about three years. When replacing the battery, use a battery equivalent to the battery originally installed  
on the computer. The computer comes with a 3-volt lithium coin cell battery.  
NOTE: The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC wall  
socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.  
WARNING! This computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of  
fire and burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:  
Do not attempt to recharge the battery.  
Do not expose to temperatures higher than 140°F (60°C).  
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water.  
Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.  
CAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings. When  
the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared. Refer to the Computer Setup  
(F10) Utility Guide for information on backing up the CMOS settings.  
NOTE: HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges,  
and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/  
Battery 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional  
equipment. Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by  
briefly touching a grounded metal object.  
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 159).  
2. Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 163).  
3. Pull back on the clip (1) that holds the battery in place, then remove the battery (2).  
4. Insert the new battery and position the clip back in place.  
5. After the battery has been replaced, reverse the disassembly procedure.  
6. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.  
7. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer Setup.  
Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.  
190 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Connector Pin Assignments  
This appendix contains the pin assignments for many computer and workstation connectors. Some of  
these connectors may not be used on the product being serviced.  
Keyboard  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Data  
2
Unused  
Ground  
+5 VDC  
Clock  
3
4
5
6
Unused  
Mouse  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Data  
2
Unused  
Ground  
+5 VDC  
Clock  
3
4
5
6
Unused  
Ethernet BNC  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Data  
2
Ground  
Keyboard 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Ethernet RJ-45  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
1
Signal  
(+) Transmit Data  
(-) Transmit Data  
(+) Receive Data  
Unused  
2
3
4
5
Unused  
6
(-) Receive Data  
Unused  
7
8
Unused  
Ethernet AUI  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Pin  
9
Signal  
Ground  
Positive AUI Differential Receive  
2
Negative AUI Differential Collision  
Positive AUI Differential Collision  
Negative AUI Differential Transmit  
Positive AUI Differential Transmit  
Ground  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
+12V  
3
Ground  
Ground  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
4
5
6
7
Ground  
8
Negative AUI Differential Receive  
192 Appendix A Connector Pin Assignments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Parallel Interface  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Pin  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Signal  
Strobe  
Acknowledge  
Busy  
2
Data Bit 0  
Data Bit 1  
Data Bit 2  
Data Bit 3  
Data Bit 4  
Data Bit 5  
Data Bit 6  
Data Bit 7  
3
Paper End  
Select  
4
5
Auto Linefeed  
Error  
6
7
Initialize Printer  
Select IN  
8
9
18–25 Signal Ground  
Serial Interface, Powered and Non-Powered  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
Signal  
1
Carrier Detect (12V if powered)  
Receive Data  
2
3
Transmit Data  
4
Data Terminal Ready  
Signal Ground  
5
6
Data Set Ready  
7
Request to Send  
Clear to Send  
8
9
Ring Indicator (5V if powered)  
Parallel Interface 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
USB  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
1
Signal  
+5 VDC  
- Data  
2
3
+ Data  
Ground  
4
Microphone  
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone)  
Pin  
Signal  
1 (Tip)  
2 (Ring)  
3 (Shield)  
Audio_left  
Power_Right  
Audio_right  
1 2 3  
Headphone  
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone)  
Pin  
Signal  
1 (Tip)  
2 (Ring)  
3 (Shield)  
Audio_left  
Power_Right  
Ground  
1 2 3  
Line-in Audio  
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone)  
Pin  
Signal  
1 (Tip)  
2 (Ring)  
3 (Shield)  
Audio_In_Left  
Audio_In_Right  
Ground  
1 2 3  
Line-out Audio  
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone)  
Pin  
Signal  
1 (Tip)  
2 (Ring)  
3 (Shield)  
Audio_Out_Left  
Audio_Out_Right  
Ground  
1 2 3  
194 Appendix A Connector Pin Assignments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
External Infrared Transceiver  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Transmit  
Receive  
Ground  
5V  
2
3
4
5
Mode  
6
Not Used  
Not Used  
Not Used  
7
8
Monitor  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Pin  
9
Signal  
Red Analog  
Green Analog  
Blue Analog  
Not used  
Ground  
+5V (fused)  
2
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Ground  
3
Not used  
4
DDC Serial Data  
Horizontal Sync  
Vertical Sync  
DDC Serial Clock  
5
6
Ground  
7
Ground  
8
Ground  
External Infrared Transceiver 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ATA/ATAPI (IDE) Standard Drive Cable  
Connector  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Reset  
Ground  
DD7  
Pin  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
Signal  
DD1  
Pin  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
Signal  
DMAK  
2
DD14  
Ground  
INTRQ  
IOCS16  
DA1  
3
DD0  
4
DD8  
DD15  
5
DD6  
Ground  
(Key)  
6
DD9  
PDIAG (cable detect)  
DA0  
7
DD5  
DMARQ  
Ground  
DIOW  
Ground  
DIOR  
8
DD10  
DD4  
DA2  
9
CS1FX  
CS3FX  
DASP  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
DD11  
DD3  
DD12  
DD2  
Ground  
IORDY  
CSEL  
Ground  
DD13  
196 Appendix A Connector Pin Assignments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CD-ROM 50-Pin Connector  
Connector  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Audio L-ch  
Audio R-ch  
Audio GND  
GND  
Pin  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
Signal  
DD12  
DD3  
Pin  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
Signal  
IORDY  
DMACK  
INTRQ  
IOCS16  
DA1  
Pin  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
Signal  
+5V  
2
+5V  
3
DD13  
DD2  
+5V  
4
GND  
5
RESET  
DD8  
DD14  
DD1  
GND  
6
PDIAG  
DA0  
GND  
7
DD7  
DD15  
DD0  
GND  
8
DD9  
DA2  
CSEL  
9
DD6  
DMARQ  
GND  
CS1FX  
CS3FX  
DASP  
+5V  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
DD10  
Vendor-specific  
Vendor-specific  
DD5  
DIOR  
DIOW  
GND  
DD11  
DD4  
+5V  
24-Pin Power  
Connector  
24  
13  
1
Front  
12  
Pin  
1
Signal  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
GND  
+5V  
Pin  
7
Signal  
GND  
Pin  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
Signal  
+3.3V  
–12V  
GND  
Pin  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Signal  
GND  
open  
+5V  
2
8
POK  
3
9
+5 Vaux  
+12V  
4
10  
11  
12  
PSON  
GND  
+5V  
5
GND  
+5V  
+12V  
+5V  
6
+3.3V  
GND  
GND  
CD-ROM 50-Pin Connector 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
24-Pin MicroFit Power (CMT, SFF)  
Connector  
24  
13  
Front  
12  
1
Pin  
1
Signal  
+5 Vaux  
GND  
Pin  
7
Signal  
Pin  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
Signal  
+12V  
Pin  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Signal  
GND  
PWRGD  
+3.3V  
2
8
+5V Sense  
GND  
+3.3V  
Sense  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
GND  
3
+5V  
9
+3.3V  
4
+5V  
10  
11  
12  
Tach  
+5V  
5
PS_ON  
GND  
GND  
+5V  
6
Fan-CMD  
+3.3V  
4-Pin Power (for CPU)  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
1
Signal  
GND  
2
GND  
3
+12V CPU  
-12V CPU  
4
6-Pin Power (for CPU) (CMT, SFF)  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
1
Signal  
GND  
2
GND  
3
GND  
4
12V CPU  
12V CPU  
+12V  
4
6
5
6
198 Appendix A Connector Pin Assignments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SATA Data and Power  
Drive Connector  
Pin  
S1  
Signal  
Ground  
B-  
Pin  
S2  
Signal  
A+  
Pin  
S3  
Signal  
A-  
Pin  
Signal  
S4  
Ground  
S5  
S6  
B+  
S7  
Ground  
V 3.3  
V 5  
P1  
Ground  
B-  
P2  
V 3.3  
Ground  
Ground  
V12  
P3  
P4  
Ground  
V 5  
P5  
P6  
P7  
P8  
P9  
V 5  
P10  
P14  
P11  
P15  
Reserved  
V 12  
P12  
Ground  
P13  
V 12  
S = Data, P = Power  
PCI Express  
x1, x4, x8, and x16 PCI Express Connector  
Pin A  
Pin Signal  
Pin Signal  
Pin Signal  
PERST#  
Pin Signal  
Pin Signal  
1
PRSNT1  
+12V  
6
JTAG3  
JTAG4  
JTAG5  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
GND  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
61  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
66  
PERp0  
PERn0  
GND  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
71  
PERp1  
PERn1  
GND  
2
7
GND  
3
+12V  
8
REFCLK+  
REFCLK-  
GND  
4
GND  
9
RSVD  
GND  
GND  
5
JTAG2  
PERn(2)  
GND  
10  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
56  
PERp2  
GND  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
51  
PERn4  
GND  
GND  
RSVD  
RSVD  
GND  
GND  
PERp7  
PERn7  
GND  
GND  
GND  
PERp6  
PERn6  
GND  
PERp3  
PERn3  
GND  
PERp5  
PERn5  
PERn10  
PERp4  
PERp9  
RSVD  
GND  
GND  
SATA Data and Power 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
52  
53  
54  
55  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
PERp8  
PERN8  
GND  
57  
58  
59  
60  
81  
82  
PERn9  
GND  
62  
63  
64  
65  
GND  
67  
68  
69  
70  
GND  
72  
73  
74  
75  
PERp13  
PERn13  
GND  
GND  
PERp12  
PERn12  
GND  
GND  
PERp11  
PERn11  
GND  
PERp10  
PERn15  
GND  
GND  
PERp14  
PERn14  
GND  
GND  
PERp15  
NOTE: x1 PCI Express uses pins 1-18  
x4 PCI Express uses pins 1-32  
x8 PCI Express uses pins 1-49  
x16 PCI Express uses pins 1-8  
PCI Express  
x1, x4, x8, and x16 PCI Express Connector  
Pin B  
Pin Signal  
Pin Signal  
Pin Signal  
Pin Signal  
Pin Signal  
1
+12V  
6
SMDAT  
GND  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
61  
WAKE#  
RSVD  
GND  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
66  
GND  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
71  
GND  
2
+12V  
7
GND  
GND  
3
RSVD  
GND  
8
+3.3 V  
JTAG1  
3.3vAux  
PRSNT2#  
GND  
GND  
PETp2  
PETn2  
GND  
4
9
PETp0  
PETn0  
GND  
PETp1  
PETn1  
PETp6  
PRTn6  
GND  
5
SMCLK  
GND  
10  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
56  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
51  
PETn7  
GND  
PETp3  
PETn3  
GND  
PETp5  
PETn5  
GND  
PETp4  
PETn4  
GND  
PRSNT2#  
GND  
GND  
RSVD  
PETn8  
GND  
PETp7  
PETp12  
PETp8  
PETn13  
GND  
GND  
200 Appendix A Connector Pin Assignments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
52  
53  
54  
55  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
GND  
57  
58  
59  
60  
81  
82  
GND  
62  
63  
64  
65  
PETp11  
PETn11  
GND  
67  
68  
69  
70  
PETn12  
GND  
72  
73  
74  
75  
GND  
GND  
PETp10  
PETn10  
GND  
GND  
PETp9  
PETn9  
GND  
GND  
PETp14  
PETn14  
GND  
PETp13  
PRSNT2#  
RSVD  
GND  
PETp15  
PETn15  
GND  
NOTE: x1 PCI Express uses pins 1-18  
x4 PCI Express uses pins 1-32  
x8 PCI Express uses pins 1-49  
x16 PCI Express uses pins 1-8  
PCI Express Mini Card  
PCI Express Mini Card Connector  
Pin Signal  
Pin Signal  
Pin Signal  
Pin Signal  
Pin Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
WAKE#  
3.3V  
7
CLKREQ#  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
REFCLK+  
19  
Reserved***  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
PERp0  
GND  
(UIM_C4)  
W_DISABLE#  
GND  
8
UIM_PWR  
GND  
UIM_RESET  
GND  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Reserved**  
GND  
9
GND  
10  
11  
12  
UIM_DATA  
REFCLK-  
UIM_CLK  
UIM_VPP  
+1.5V  
GND  
PERST#  
PERn0  
Reserved**  
1.5V  
Reserved ***  
(UIM_C8)  
SMB_CLK  
18  
GND  
+3.3Vaux  
PCI Express Mini Card 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
31  
32  
33  
34  
36  
36  
PETn0  
SMB_DATA  
PETp0  
GND  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
Reserved*  
USB_D+  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
Reserved*  
LED_WLAN#  
Reserved*  
LED_WPAN#  
Reserved*  
+1.5V  
49  
50  
51  
52  
Reserved*  
GND  
Reserved*  
GND  
Reserved*  
+3.3V  
GND  
Reserved*  
LED_WWAN#  
USB_D-  
NOTE: *Reserved for future second PCI Express LAN (if needed)  
**Reserved for future wireless coexistence control interface (if needed)  
***Reserved for future UIM interface (if needed)  
DVI Connector  
Connector and Icon  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Pin  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Signal  
T.M.D.S. Data2–  
T.M.D.S. Data2+  
T.M.D.S. Data2/4 Shield  
T.M.D.S. Data4–  
T.M.D.S. Data4+  
DDC Clock  
T.M.D.S. Data3+  
+5V Power  
2
3
Ground (for +5V)  
Hot Pug Detect  
4
5
T.M.D.S. Data0–  
T.M.D.S. Data0+  
T.M.D.S. Data0/5 Shield  
T.M.D.S. Data5–  
T.M.D.S. Data5+  
T.M.D.S. Data Shield  
T.M.D.S. Clock+  
T.M.D.S. Clock-  
6
7
DDC Data  
8
No Connect  
9
T.M.D.S. Data1–  
T.M.D.S. Data1+  
T.M.D.S. Data1/3 Shield  
T.M.D.S. Data3–  
10  
11  
12  
202 Appendix A Connector Pin Assignments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B Power Cord Set Requirements  
The power supplies on some computers have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature  
on the computer permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-120 or 220-240 volts AC. Power  
supplies on those computers that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal  
switches that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage.  
The power cord set received with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country where  
you purchased the equipment.  
Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use  
the computer.  
General Requirements  
The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:  
1. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation  
in the country where the power cord set will be installed.  
2. The power cord set must have a minimum current capacity of 10A (7A Japan only) and a nominal  
voltage rating of 125 or 250 volts AC, as required by each country’s power system.  
3. The diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG, and the length of the cord  
must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet).  
The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon  
it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the  
cord exits from the product.  
WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is  
damaged in any manner, replace it immediately.  
Japanese Power Cord Requirements  
For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product.  
CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products.  
General Requirements 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Country-Specific Requirements  
Additional requirements specific to a country are shown in parentheses and explained below.  
Country  
Accrediting Agency  
Country  
Accrediting Agency  
Australia (1)  
Austria (1)  
Belgium (1)  
Canada (2)  
Denmark (1)  
Finland (1)  
France (1)  
Germany (1)  
EANSW  
OVE  
Italy (1)  
IMQ  
Japan (3)  
METI  
NEMKO  
SEMKO  
SEV  
CEBC  
CSA  
Norway (1)  
Sweden (1)  
Switzerland (1)  
United Kingdom (1)  
United States (2)  
DEMKO  
SETI  
BSI  
UTE  
UL  
VDE  
1. The flexible cord must be Type HO5VV-F, 3-conductor, 0.75mm2 conductor size. Power cord set fittings (appliance coupler  
and wall plug) must bear the certification mark of the agency responsible for evaluation in the country where it will be used.  
2. The flexible cord must be Type SVT or equivalent, No. 18 AWG, 3-conductor. The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding  
type with a NEMA 5-15P (15A, 125V) or NEMA 6-15P (15A, 250V) configuration.  
3. Appliance coupler, flexible cord, and wall plug must bear a “T” mark and registration number in accordance with the  
Japanese Dentori Law. Flexible cord must be Type VCT or VCTF, 3-conductor, 0.75 mm2 conductor size. Wall plug must  
be a two-pole grounding type with a Japanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7A, 125V) configuration.  
204 Appendix B Power Cord Set Requirements  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C POST Error Messages  
This appendix lists the error codes, error messages, and the various indicator light and audible  
sequences that you may encounter during Power-On Self-Test (POST) or computer restart, the probable  
source of the problem, and steps you can take to resolve the error condition.  
POST Message Disabled suppresses most system messages during POST, such as memory count  
and non-error text messages. If a POST error occurs, the screen will display the error message. To  
manually switch to the POST Messages Enabled mode during POST, press any key (except F10 or  
F12). The default mode is POST Message Disabled.  
The speed at which the computer loads the operating system and the extent to which it is tested are  
determined by the POST mode selection.  
Quick Boot is a fast startup process that does not run all of the system level tests, such as the memory  
test. Full Boot runs all of the ROM-based system tests and takes longer to complete.  
Full Boot may also be enabled to run every 1 to 30 days on a regularly scheduled basis. To establish  
the schedule, reconfigure the computer to the Full Boot Every x Days mode, using Computer Setup.  
NOTE: For more information on Computer Setup, see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages  
This section covers those POST errors that have numeric codes associated with them. The section also  
includes some text messages that may be encountered during POST.  
NOTE: The computer will beep once after a POST text message is displayed on the screen.  
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
101-Option ROM Checksum Error  
System ROM or expansion board option  
ROM checksum.  
1. Verify the correct ROM.  
2. Flash the ROM if needed.  
3. If an expansion board was recently  
added, remove it to see if the problem  
remains.  
4. Clear CMOS.  
5. If the message disappears, there may  
be a problem with the expansion card.  
6. Replace the system board.  
1. Clear CMOS.  
103-System Board Failure  
DMA or timers.  
2. Remove expansion boards.  
3. Replace the system board.  
110-Out of Memory Space for Option ROMs Recently added PCI expansion card contains 1. If a PCI expansion card was recently  
an option ROM too large to download during  
POST.  
added, remove it to see if the problem  
remains.  
2. In Computer Setup, set Advanced >  
Device Options > NIC PXE Option  
ROM Download to DISABLE to prevent  
PXE option ROM for the internal NIC  
from being downloaded during POST to  
free more memory for an expansion  
card's option ROM. Internal PXE option  
ROM is used for booting from the NIC to  
a PXE server.  
3. Ensure the ACPI/USB Buffers @ Top of  
Memory setting in Computer Setup is  
enabled.  
162-System Options Not Set  
Configuration incorrect.  
Run Computer Setup and check the  
configuration in Advanced > Onboard  
Devices.  
RTC (real-time clock) battery may need to  
be replaced.  
Reset the date and time under Control  
Panel. If the problem persists, replace the  
RTC battery. See the Hardware Reference  
Guide for instructions on installing a new  
battery, or contact an authorized dealer or  
reseller for RTC battery replacement.  
163-Time & Date Not Set  
Invalid time or date in configuration memory. Reset the date and time under Control  
Panel (Computer Setup can also be used). If  
RTC (real-time clock) battery may need to  
the problem persists, replace the RTC  
be replaced.  
battery. See the Hardware Reference Guide  
for instructions on installing a new battery, or  
206 Appendix C POST Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
contact an authorized dealer or reseller for  
RTC battery replacement.  
163-Time & Date Not Set  
164-MemorySize Error  
164-MemorySize Error  
CMOS jumper may not be properly installed. Check for proper placement of the CMOS  
jumper if applicable.  
Memory amount has changed since the last Press the F1 key to save the memory  
boot (memory added or removed).  
changes.  
Memory configuration incorrect.  
1. Run Computer Setup or Windows  
utilities.  
2. Make sure the memory module(s) are  
installed properly.  
3. If third-party memory has been added,  
test using HP-only memory.  
4. Verify proper memory module type.  
201-Memory Error  
RAM failure.  
1. Run Computer Setup or Windows  
utilities.  
2. Ensure memory modules are correctly  
installed.  
3. Verify proper memory module type.  
4. Remove and replace the identified faulty  
memory module(s).  
5. If the error persists after replacing  
memory modules, replace the system  
board.  
213-Incompatible Memory Module in  
Memory Socket(s) X, X, ...  
A memory module in memory socket  
identified in the error message is missing  
critical SPD information, or is incompatible  
with the chipset.  
1. Verify proper memory module type.  
2. Try another memory socket.  
3. Replace DIMM with a module  
conforming to the SPD standard.  
214-DIMM Configuration Warning  
Populated DIMM Configuration is not  
optimized.  
Rearrange the DIMMs so that each channel  
has the same amount of memory.  
219-ECC Memory Module Detected ECC  
Modules not supported on this Platform  
Recently added memory module(s) support 1. If additional memory was recently  
ECC memory error correction.  
added, remove it to see if the problem  
remains.  
2. Check product documentation for  
memory support information.  
301-Keyboard Error  
Keyboard failure.  
1. Reconnect keyboard with computer  
turned off.  
2. Check connector for bent or missing  
pins.  
3. Ensure that none of the keys are  
depressed.  
4. Replace keyboard.  
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
303-Keyboard Controller Error  
I/O board keyboard controller.  
1. Reconnect keyboard with computer  
turned off.  
2. Replace the system board.  
304-Keyboard or System Unit Error  
Keyboard failure.  
1. Reconnect the keyboard with computer  
turned off.  
2. Ensure that none of the keys are  
depressed.  
3. Replace the keyboard.  
4. Replace the system board.  
404-Parallel Port Address Conflict Detected Both external and internal ports are assigned 1. Remove any parallel port expansion  
to parallel port X.  
cards.  
2. Clear CMOS.  
3. Reconfigure card resources and/or run  
Computer Setup.  
410-Audio Interrupt Conflict  
IRQ address conflicts with another device.  
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ in  
Advanced > Onboard Devices.  
411-Network Interface Card Interrupt Conflict IRQ address conflicts with another device.  
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ in  
Advanced > Onboard Devices.  
501-Display Adapter Failure  
Graphics display controller.  
1. Reseat the graphics card (if applicable).  
2. Clear CMOS.  
3. Verify monitor is attached and turned  
on.  
4. Replace the graphics card (if possible).  
510-Flash Screen Image Corrupted  
Flash Screen image has errors.  
Reflash the system ROM with the latest BIOS  
image.  
511-CPU, CPUA, or CPUB Fan not Detected CPU fan is not connected or may have  
malfunctioned.  
1. Reseat CPU fan.  
2. Reseat fan cable.  
3. Replace CPU fan.  
512-Chassis, Rear Chassis, or Front Chassis Chassis, rear chassis, or front chassis fan is 1. Reseat chassis, rear chassis, or front  
Fan not Detected  
not connected or may have malfunctioned.  
chassis fan.  
2. Reseat fan cable.  
3. Replace chassis, rear chassis, or front  
chassis fan.  
514-CPU or Chassis Fan not Detected  
601-Diskette Controller Error  
CPU or chassis fan is not connected or may 1. Reseat CPU or chassis fan.  
have malfunctioned.  
2. Reseat fan cable.  
3. Replace CPU or chassis fan.  
Diskette controller circuitry or floppy drive  
circuitry incorrect.  
1. Run Computer Setup.  
2. Check and/or replace cables.  
3. Clear CMOS.  
208 Appendix C POST Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
4. Replace diskette drive.  
5. Replace the system board.  
1. Run Computer Setup.  
605-Diskette Drive Type Error  
Mismatch in drive type.  
2. Disconnect any other diskette controller  
devices (tape drives).  
3. Clear CMOS.  
610-External Storage Device Failure  
External tape drive not connected.  
Configuration error.  
Reinstall tape drive or press F1 and allow  
system to reconfigure without the drive.  
611-Primary Floppy Port Address  
Assignment Conflict  
Run Computer Setup and check the  
configuration in Advanced > Onboard  
Devices.  
660-Display cache is detected unreliable  
Integrated graphics controller display cache Replace system board if minimal graphics  
is not working properly and will be disabled. degrading is an issue.  
912-Computer Cover Has Been Removed  
Since Last System Startup  
Computer cover was removed since last  
system startup.  
No action required.  
917-Front Audio Not Connected  
Front audio harness has been detached or  
unseated from motherboard.  
Reconnect or replace front audio harness.  
Reconnect or replace front USB harness.  
918-Front USB Not Connected  
Front USB harness has been detached or  
unseated from motherboard.  
921-Device in PCI Express slot failed to  
initialize  
There is an incompatibility/problem with this Try rebooting the system. If the error  
device and the system or PCI Express Link  
could not be retrained to an x1.  
reoccurs, the device may not work with this  
system  
1151-Serial Port A Address Conflict Detected Both external and internal serial ports are  
assigned to COM1.  
1. Remove any serial port expansion  
cards.  
2. Clear CMOS.  
3. Reconfigure card resources and/or run  
Computer Setup or Windows utilities.  
1152-Serial Port B Address Conflict Detected Both external and internal serial ports are  
assigned to COM2.  
1. Remove any serial port expansion  
cards.  
2. Clear CMOS.  
3. Reconfigure card resources and/or run  
Computer Setup or Windows utilities.  
1155-Serial Port Address Conflict Detected  
Both external and internal serial ports are  
assigned to same IRQ.  
1. Remove any serial port expansion  
cards.  
2. Clear CMOS.  
3. Reconfigure card resources and/or run  
Computer Setup or Windows utilities.  
1201-System Audio Address Conflict  
Detected  
Device IRQ address conflicts with another  
device.  
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ in  
Advanced > Onboard Devices.  
1202-MIDI Port Address Conflict Detected  
Device IRQ address conflicts with another  
device.  
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ in  
Advanced > Onboard Devices.  
1203-Game Port Address Conflict Detected Device IRQ address conflicts with another  
device.  
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ in  
Advanced > Onboard Devices.  
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)  
Control panel message Description  
Recommended action  
1720-SMART Hard Drive Detects Imminent Hard drive is about to fail. (Some hard drives 1. Determine if hard drive is giving correct  
Failure  
have a hard drive firmware patch that will fix  
an erroneous error message.)  
error message. Enter Computer Setup  
and run the Drive Protection System test  
under Storage > DPS Self-test.  
2. Apply hard drive firmware patch  
if applicable. (Available at  
3. Back up contents and replace hard  
drive.  
1796-SATA Cabling Error  
One or more SATA devices are improperly  
Ensure SATA connectors are used in  
attached. For optimal performance, the SATA ascending order. For one device, use SATA  
0 and SATA 1 connectors must be used  
before SATA 2 and SATA 3.  
0. For two devices, use SATA 0 and SATA 1.  
For three devices, use SATA 0, SATA1, and  
SATA 2.  
1797-SATA Drivelock is not supported in  
RAID mode.  
Drivelock is enabled on one or more SATA  
hard drives, and they cannot be accessed  
while the system is configured for RAID  
mode.  
Either remove the Drivelocked SATA device  
or disable the Drivelock feature. To disable  
the Drivelock feature, enter Computer Setup,  
change Storage > Storage Options > SATA  
Emulation to IDE, and select File > Save  
Changes and Exit. Reenter Computer Setup  
and select Security > Drivelock. For each  
listed Drivelock-capable SATA device,  
ensure Drivelock is Disabled. Lastly,  
change Storage > Storage Options > SATA  
Emulation back to RAID and select File >  
Save Changes and Exit.  
1801-Microcode Patch Error  
Processor is not supported by ROM BIOS.  
1. Upgrade BIOS to proper version.  
2. Change the processor.  
2200-PMM Allocation Error during MEBx  
Download  
Memory error during POST execution of the 1. Reboot the computer.  
Management Engine (ME) BIOS Extensions  
2. Unplug the power cord, re-seat the  
option ROM  
memory modules, and reboot the  
computer.  
3. If the memory configuration was  
recently changed, unplug the computer,  
restore the original memory  
configuration, and reboot the computer.  
4. If the error persists, replace the system  
board.  
2201-MEBx Module did not checksum  
correctly  
Memory error during POST execution of the 1. Reboot the computer.  
Management Engine (ME) BIOS Extensions  
2. Unplug the power cord, re-seat the  
option ROM  
memory modules, and reboot the  
computer.  
3. If the memory configuration was  
recently changed, unplug the power  
cord, restore the original memory  
configuration, and reboot the computer.  
4. If the error persists, replace the system  
board.  
210 Appendix C POST Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)  
Control panel message Description  
Recommended action  
2202-PMM Deallocation Error during MEBx Memory error during POST execution of the 1. Reboot the computer.  
cleanup  
Management Engine (ME) BIOS Extensions  
option ROM  
2. Unplug the power cord, re-seat the  
memory modules, and reboot the  
computer.  
3. If the memory configuration was  
recently changed, unplug the power  
cord, restore the original memory  
configuration, and reboot the computer.  
4. If the error persists, replace the system  
board.  
2203-Setup error during MEBx execution  
MEBx selection or exit resulted in a setup  
failure.  
1. Reboot the computer.  
2. Unplug the power cord, re-seat the  
memory modules, and reboot the  
computer.  
3. If the memory configuration was  
recently changed, unplug the power  
cord, restore the original memory  
configuration, and reboot the computer.  
4. If the error persists, replace the system  
board.  
2204-Inventory error during MEBx execution BIOS information passed to the MEBx  
resulted in a failure.  
1. Reboot the computer.  
2. If the error persists, update to the latest  
BIOS version.  
3. If the error still persists, replace the  
system board.  
2205-Interface error during MEBx execution MEBx operation experienced a hardware  
error during communication with ME.  
1. Reboot the computer.  
2. If the error persists, update to the latest  
BIOS version.  
3. If the error still persists, replace the  
system board.  
2211-Memory not configured correctly for  
proper MEBx execution.  
DIMM1 is not installed.  
Make sure there is a memory module in the  
black DIMM1 socket and that it is properly  
seated.  
Invalid Electronic Serial Number  
Electronic serial number is missing.  
Enter the correct serial number in Computer  
Setup.  
Network Server Mode Active and No  
Keyboard Attached  
Keyboard failure while Network Server Mode 1. Reconnect keyboard with computer  
enabled.  
turned off.  
2. Check connector for bent or missing  
pins.  
3. Ensure that none of the keys are  
depressed.  
4. Replace keyboard.  
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Parity Check 2  
Description  
Recommended action  
Parity RAM failure.  
Run Computer Setup and Diagnostic utilities.  
System will not boot without fan  
CPU fan not installed or disconnected in  
VSFF chassis.  
1. Remove the computer cover, press the  
power button, and see if the processor  
fan spins. If the processor fan is not  
spinning, make sure the fan's cable is  
plugged onto the system board header.  
Ensure the heatsink is properly seated  
and installed.  
2. If the fan is plugged in and the heatsink  
is properly seated but the fan does not  
spin, then replace the heatsink-fan  
assembly.  
Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and  
Audible Codes  
This section covers the front panel LED codes as well as the audible codes that may occur before or  
during POST that do not necessarily have an error code or text message associated with them.  
WARNING! When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to the  
system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be sure  
to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to cool  
before touching.  
NOTE: If you see flashing LEDs on a PS/2 keyboard, look for flashing LEDs on the front panel of the  
computer and refer to the following table to determine the front panel LED codes.  
Recommended actions in the following table are listed in the order in which they should be performed.  
Not all diagnostic lights and audible codes are available on all models.  
Table C-2 Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes  
Activity  
Beeps  
Possible Cause  
Recommended Action  
Green Power LED On.  
None  
None  
Computer on.  
None  
Green Power LED flashes  
every two seconds.  
Computer in Suspend to  
RAM mode (some models to wake the computer.  
None required. Press any key or move the mouse  
only) or normal Suspend  
mode.  
Red Power LED flashes two  
times, once every second,  
followed by a two second  
pause. Beeps stop after fifth  
iteration but LEDs continue  
until problem is solved.  
2
Processor thermal  
protection activated:  
1. Ensure that the computer air vents are not  
blocked and the processor cooling fan is  
running.  
A fan may be blocked or  
not turning.  
2. Open hood, press power button, and see if  
the processor fan spins. If the processor fan  
is not spinning, make sure the fan's cable is  
plugged onto the system board header.  
OR  
The heatsink/fan  
assembly is not properly  
attached to the processor.  
3. If fan is plugged in, but is not spinning, then  
replace heatsink/fan assembly.  
4. Contact an authorized reseller or service  
provider.  
212 Appendix C POST Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Table C-2 Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (continued)  
Activity  
Beeps  
Possible Cause  
Recommended Action  
Red Power LED flashes three  
times, once every second,  
followed by a two second  
pause. Beeps stop after fifth  
iteration but LEDs continue  
until problem is solved.  
3
Processor not installed  
(not an indicator of bad  
processor).  
1. Check to see that the processor is present.  
2. Reseat the processor.  
Red Power LED flashes four  
times, once every second,  
followed by a two second  
pause. Beeps stop after fifth  
iteration but LEDs continue  
until problem is solved.  
4
Power failure (power  
supply is overloaded).  
1. Open the hood and ensure the 4 or 6-wire  
power supply cable is seated into the  
connector on the system board.  
OR  
2. Check if a device is causing the problem by  
removing ALL attached devices (such as  
hard, diskette, or optical drives, and  
The incorrect external  
power supply adapter is  
being used on the USDT.  
expansion cards). Power on the system. If  
the system enters the POST, then power off  
and replace one device at a time and repeat  
this procedure until failure occurs. Replace  
the device that is causing the failure.  
Continue adding devices one at a time to  
ensure all devices are functioning properly.  
3. Replace the power supply.  
4. Replace the system board.  
OR  
The USDT power supply adapter must be at 135W  
and use the Smart ID technology before the  
system will power up. Replace the power supply  
adapter with the HP-supplied USDT power supply  
adapter.  
Red Power LED flashes five  
times, once every second,  
followed by a two second  
pause. Beeps stop after fifth  
iteration but LEDs continue  
until problem is solved.  
5
Pre-video memory error.  
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the DIMMs or  
the system board, you must unplug the computer  
power cord before attempting to reseat, install, or  
remove a DIMM module.  
1. Reseat DIMMs.  
2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate the  
faulty module.  
3. Replace third-party memory with HP  
memory.  
4. Replace the system board.  
For systems with a graphics card:  
1. Reseat the graphics card.  
2. Replace the graphics card.  
3. Replace the system board.  
Red Power LED flashes six  
times, once every second,  
followed by a two second  
pause. Beeps stop after fifth  
iteration but LEDs continue  
until problem is solved.  
6
Pre-video graphics error.  
For systems with integrated graphics, replace the  
system board.  
Red Power LED flashes seven  
times, once every second,  
followed by a two second  
pause. Beeps stop after fifth  
7
System board failure  
(ROM detected failure  
prior to video).  
Replace the system board.  
Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table C-2 Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (continued)  
Activity  
Beeps  
Possible Cause  
Recommended Action  
iteration but LEDs continue  
until problem is solved.  
Red Power LED flashes eight  
times, once every second,  
followed by a two second  
pause. Beeps stop after fifth  
iteration but LEDs continue  
until problem is solved.  
8
Invalid ROM based on bad 1. Reflash the system ROM with the latest BIOS  
checksum.  
image. See the “Boot Block Emergency  
Recovery Mode” section of the Desktop  
Management Guide for more information.  
2. Replace the system board.  
Red Power LED flashes nine  
times, once every second,  
followed by a two second  
pause. Beeps stop after fifth  
iteration but LEDs continue  
until problem is solved.  
9
System powers on but is  
unable to boot.  
1. Check that the voltage selector, located on  
the rear of the power supply (some models),  
is set to the appropriate voltage. Proper  
voltage setting depends on your region.  
2. Unplug the AC power cord from the  
computer, wait 30 seconds, then plug the  
power cord back in to the computer.  
3. Replace the system board.  
4. Replace the processor.  
Red Power LED flashes ten  
times, once every second,  
followed by a two second  
pause. Beeps stop after fifth  
iteration but LEDs continue  
until problem is solved.  
10  
Bad option card.  
1. Check each option card by removing the card  
(one at a time if multiple cards), then power  
on the system to see if fault goes away.  
2. Once a bad card is identified, remove and  
replace the bad option card.  
3. Replace the system board.  
Red Power LED flashes eleven 11  
times, once every second,  
followed by a two second  
pause. Beeps stop after fifth  
iteration but LEDs continue  
until problem is solved.  
The current processor  
does not support a feature  
previously enabled on this  
system.  
1. Install a TXT capable processor.  
2. Disable TXT in the Computer Setup (F10)  
utility.  
3. Reinstall the original processor.  
System does not power on and None  
LEDs are not flashing.  
System unable to power  
on.  
Press and hold the power button for less than 4  
seconds. If the hard drive LED turns green, the  
power button is working correctly. Try the  
following:  
1. Check that the voltage selector (some  
models), located on the rear of the power  
supply, is set to the appropriate voltage.  
Proper voltage setting depends on your  
region.  
2. Replace the system board.  
OR  
Press and hold the power button for less than 4  
seconds. If the hard drive LED does not turn on  
green then:  
1. Check that the unit is plugged into a working  
AC outlet.  
2. Open hood and check that the power button  
harness is properly connected to the system  
board.  
214 Appendix C POST Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table C-2 Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (continued)  
Activity  
Beeps  
Possible Cause  
Recommended Action  
3. Check that both power supply cables are  
properly connected to the system board.  
4. Check to see if the 5V_aux light on the  
system board is turned on. If it is turned on,  
then replace the power button harness. If the  
problem persists, replace the system board.  
5. If the 5V_aux light on the system board is not  
turned on, remove the expansion cards one  
at a time until the 5V_aux light on the system  
board turns on. It the problem persists,  
replace the power supply.  
Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
This chapter provides information on how to identify and correct minor problems, such as diskette drive,  
hard drive, optical drive, graphics, audio, memory, and software problems. If you encounter problems  
with the computer, refer to the tables in this chapter for probable causes and recommended solutions.  
NOTE: For information on specific error messages that may appear on the screen during Power-On  
Self-Test (POST) at startup, refer to POST Error Messages on page 205.  
Safety and Comfort  
WARNING! Misuse of the computer or failure to establish a safe and comfortable work environment  
may result in discomfort or serious injury. Refer to the Safety & Comfort Guide at http://www.hp.com/  
ergo for more information on choosing a workspace and creating a safe and comfortable work  
environment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. For more information, refer to the Safety & Regulatory  
Information guide.  
Before You Call for Technical Support  
If you are having problems with the computer, try the appropriate solutions below to try to isolate the  
exact problem before calling for technical support.  
Run the diagnostics utility. Refer to Chapter 1, Computer Diagnostic Features on page 15 for more  
information.  
Run the Drive Protection System (DPS) Self-Test in Computer Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup  
(F10) Utility Guide for more information.  
Check the Power LED on the front of the computer to see if it is flashing red. The flashing lights  
are error codes that will help you diagnose the problem. Refer to POST Error Messages  
on page 205 for more information.  
If the screen is blank, plug the monitor into a different video port on the computer if one is available.  
Or, change out the monitor with a monitor that you know is functioning properly.  
If you are working on a network, plug another computer with a different cable into the network  
connection. There may be a problem with the network plug or cable.  
If you recently added new hardware, remove the hardware and see if the computer functions  
properly.  
If you recently installed new software, uninstall the software and see if the computer functions  
properly.  
216 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Boot the computer to the Safe Mode to see if it will boot without all of the drivers loaded. When  
booting the operating system, use “Last Known Configuration.”  
Refer to the comprehensive online technical support at http://www.hp.com/support.  
Refer to the following Helpful Hints on page 217 section in this guide.  
To assist you in resolving problems online, HP Instant Support Professional Edition provides you with  
self-solve diagnostics. If you need to contact HP support, use HP Instant Support Professional Edition's  
online chat feature. Access HP Instant Support Professional Edition at: http://www.hp.com/go/ispe.  
Access the Business Support Center (BSC) at http://www.hp.com/go/bizsupport for the latest online  
support information, software and drivers, proactive notification, and worldwide community of peers and  
HP experts.  
If it becomes necessary to call for technical assistance, be prepared to do the following to ensure that  
your service call is handled properly:  
Be in front of your computer when you call.  
Write down the computer serial number and product ID number, and the monitor serial number  
before calling.  
Spend time troubleshooting the problem with the service technician.  
Remove any hardware that was recently added to your system.  
Remove any software that was recently installed.  
Restore the system from the Recovery Disc Set that you created or restore the system to its original  
factory condition in HP Backup and Recovery Manager.  
CAUTION: Restoring the system will erase all data on the hard drive. Be sure to back up all data files  
before running the restore process.  
NOTE: For sales information and warranty upgrades (Care Packs), call your local authorized service  
provider or dealer.  
Helpful Hints  
If you encounter problems with the computer, monitor, or software, see the following list of general  
suggestions before taking further action:  
Check that the computer and monitor are plugged into a working electrical outlet.  
Check to see that the voltage select switch (some models) is set to the appropriate voltage for your  
region (115V or 230V).  
Check to see that the computer is turned on and the green power light is on.  
Check to see that the monitor is turned on and the green monitor light is on.  
Check the Power LED on the front of the computer to see if it is flashing red. The flashing lights  
are error codes that will help you diagnose the problem. Refer to POST Error Messages  
on page 205 for more information.  
Turn up the brightness and contrast controls of the monitor if the monitor is dim.  
Press and hold any key. If the system beeps, then the keyboard should be operating correctly.  
Helpful Hints 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Check all cable connections for loose connections or incorrect connections.  
Wake the computer by pressing any key on the keyboard or pressing the power button. If the system  
remains in suspend mode, shut down the computer by pressing and holding the power button for  
at least four seconds then press the power button again to restart the computer. If the system will  
not shut down, unplug the power cord, wait a few seconds, then plug it in again. The computer will  
restart if automatic start on power loss is set in Computer Setup. If it does not restart, press the  
power button to start the computer.  
Reconfigure the computer after installing a non–plug and play expansion board or other option.  
Be sure that all the needed device drivers have been installed. For example, if you are using a  
printer, you need a driver for that model printer.  
Remove all bootable media (diskette, CD, or USB device) from the system before turning it on.  
If you have installed an operating system other than the factory-installed operating system, check  
to be sure that it is supported on the system.  
If the system has multiple video sources (embedded, PCI, or PCI-Express adapters) installed  
(embedded video on some models only) and a single monitor, the monitor must be plugged into  
the monitor connector on the source selected as the primary VGA adapter. During boot, the other  
monitor connectors are disabled and if the monitor is connected into these ports, the monitor will  
not function. You can select which source will be the default VGA source in Computer Setup.  
CAUTION: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, there is always voltage applied  
to the system board. You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the  
computer to prevent system board or component damage.  
218 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Solving General Problems  
You may be able to easily resolve the general problems described in this section. If a problem persists  
and you are unable to resolve it yourself or if you feel uncomfortable about performing the operation,  
contact an authorized dealer or reseller.  
WARNING! When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to the  
system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be sure  
to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to cool  
before touching.  
Table D-1 Solving General Problems  
Computer appears locked up and will not turn off when the power button is pressed.  
Cause  
Solution  
Software control of the power switch is not functional.  
1. Press and hold the power button for at least four seconds  
until the computer turns off.  
2. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.  
Computer will not respond to USB keyboard or mouse.  
Cause  
Solution  
Computer is in standby mode.  
To resume from standby mode, press the power button or  
press any key.  
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby mode,  
do not hold down the power button for more than four seconds.  
Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you will lose any  
unsaved data.  
System has locked up.  
Restart computer.  
Computer date and time display is incorrect.  
Cause  
Solution  
RTC (real-time clock) battery may need to be replaced.  
First, reset the date and time under Control Panel (Computer  
Setup can also be used to update the RTC date and time). If  
the problem persists, replace the RTC battery. See the  
Hardware Reference Guide for instructions on installing a new  
battery, or contact an authorized dealer or reseller for RTC  
battery replacement.  
NOTE: Connecting the computer to a live AC outlet prolongs  
the life of the RTC battery.  
Cursor will not move using the arrow keys on the keypad.  
Cause  
Solution  
The Num Lock key may be on.  
Press the Num Lock key. The Num Lock light should not be on  
if you want to use the arrow keys. The Num Lock key can be  
disabled (or enabled) in Computer Setup.  
Solving General Problems 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-1 Solving General Problems (continued)  
There is no sound or sound volume is too low.  
Cause  
Solution  
System volume may be set low or muted.  
1. Check the F10 BIOS settings to make sure the internal  
system speaker is not muted (this setting does not affect  
the external speakers).  
2. Make sure the external speakers are properly connected  
and powered on and that the speakers' volume control is  
set correctly.  
3. Use the system volume control available in the operating  
system to make sure the speakers are not muted or to  
increase the volume.  
Cannot remove computer cover or access panel.  
Cause  
Solution  
Smart Cover Lock, featured on some computers, is locked.  
Unlock the Smart Cover Lock using Computer Setup.  
The Smart Cover FailSafe Key, a device for manually disabling  
the Smart Cover Lock, is available from HP. You will need the  
FailSafe Key in case of forgotten password, power loss, or  
computer malfunction. Order PN 166527-001 for the wrench-  
style key or PN 166527-002 for the screwdriver bit key.  
Poor performance is experienced.  
Cause  
Solution  
Processor is hot.  
1. Make sure airflow to the computer is not blocked. Leave  
a 10.2-cm (4-inch) clearance on all vented sides of the  
computer and above the monitor to permit the required  
airflow  
2. Make sure fans are connected and working properly  
(some fans only operate when needed).  
3. Make sure the processor heatsink is installed properly.  
Hard drive is full.  
Transfer data from the hard drive to create more space on the  
hard drive.  
Low on memory.  
Add more memory.  
Hard drive fragmented.  
Defragment hard drive.  
Restart the computer.  
Program previously accessed did not release reserved  
memory back to the system.  
Virus resident on the hard drive.  
Too many applications running.  
Run virus protection program.  
1. Close unnecessary applications to free up memory.  
2. Add more memory. Some applications run in the  
background and can be closed by right-clicking on their  
corresponding icons in the task tray. To prevent these  
applications from launching at startup, go to Start >  
Run (Windows XP) or Start > Accessories > Run  
220 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-1 Solving General Problems (continued)  
Poor performance is experienced.  
Cause  
Solution  
(Windows Vista) and type msconfig. On the Startup tab  
of the System Configuration Utility, uncheck applications  
that you do not want to launch automatically.  
Some software applications, especially games, are stressful  
on the graphics subsystem  
1. Lower the display resolution for the current application or  
consult the documentation that came with the application  
for suggestions on how to improve performance by  
adjusting parameters in the application.  
2. Add more memory.  
3. Upgrade the graphics solution.  
Restart the computer.  
Cause unknown.  
Computer powered off automatically and the Power LED flashes Red two times, once every second, followed by a two  
second pause, and the computer beeps two times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing).  
Cause  
Solution  
Processor thermal protection activated:  
A fan may be blocked or not turning.  
OR  
1. Ensure that the computer air vents are not blocked and  
the processor cooling fan is running.  
2. Open hood, press power button, and see if the processor  
fan spins. If the processor fan is not spinning, make sure  
the fan's cable is plugged onto the system board header.  
The heatsink is not properly attached to the processor.  
3. If fan is plugged in, but is not spinning, then replace the  
heatsink/fan assembly.  
4. Contact an authorized reseller or service provider.  
System does not power on and the LEDs on the front of the computer are not flashing.  
Cause  
Solution  
System unable to power on.  
Press and hold the power button for less than 4 seconds. If the  
hard drive LED turns green, then:  
1. Check that the voltage selector, located on the rear of the  
power supply on some models, is set to the appropriate  
voltage. Proper voltage setting depends on your region.  
2. Remove the expansion cards one at a time until the  
5V_aux light on the system board turns on.  
3. Replace the system board.  
OR  
Press and hold the power button for less than 4 seconds. If the  
hard drive LED does not turn on green then:  
1. Check that the unit is plugged into a working AC outlet.  
2. Open hood and check that the power button harness is  
properly connected to the system board.  
Solving General Problems 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table D-1 Solving General Problems (continued)  
System does not power on and the LEDs on the front of the computer are not flashing.  
Cause  
Solution  
3. Check that both power supply cables are properly  
connected to the system board.  
4. Check to see if the 5V_aux light on the system board is  
turned on. If it is turned on, then replace the power button  
harness.  
5. If the 5V_aux light on the system board is off, then replace  
the power supply.  
6. Replace the system board.  
Solving Power Problems  
Common causes and solutions for power problems are listed in the following table.  
Table D-2 Solving Power Problems  
Power supply shuts down intermittently.  
Cause  
Solution  
Voltage selector switch on rear of computer chassis (some  
models) not switched to correct line voltage (115V or 230V).  
Select the proper AC voltage using the selector switch.  
Power supply will not turn on because of internal power supply Contact an authorized service provider to replace the power  
fault. supply.  
Computer powered off automatically and the Power LED flashes Red two times, once every second, followed by a two  
second pause, and the computer beeps two times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)  
Cause  
Solution  
Processor thermal protection activated:  
A fan may be blocked or not turning.  
OR  
1. Ensure that the computer air vents are not blocked and  
the processor cooling fan is running.  
2. Open hood, press power button, and see if the processor  
fan spins. If the processor fan is not spinning, make sure  
the fan's cable is plugged onto the system board header.  
The heatsink is not properly attached to the processor.  
3. If fan is plugged in, but is not spinning, then replace the  
heatsink/fan assembly.  
4. Contact an authorized reseller or service provider.  
222 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-2 Solving Power Problems (continued)  
Power LED flashes Red four times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps four  
times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)  
Cause  
Solution  
Power failure (power supply is overloaded).  
1. Check that the voltage selector, located on the rear of the  
power supply (some models), is set to the appropriate  
voltage. Proper voltage setting depends on your region.  
2. Open the hood and ensure the 4- or 6-wire power supply  
cable is seated into the connector on the system board.  
3. Check if a device is causing the problem by removing ALL  
attached devices (such as hard, diskette, or optical  
drives, and expansion cards). Power on the system. If the  
system enters the POST, then power off and replace one  
device at a time and repeat this procedure until failure  
occurs. Replace the device that is causing the failure.  
Continue adding devices one at a time to ensure all  
devices are functioning properly.  
4. Replace the power supply.  
5. Replace the system board.  
The incorrect external power supply adapter is being used on The USDT power supply adapter must be at 135W and use the  
the USDT.  
Smart ID technology before the system will power up. Replace  
the power supply adapter with the HP-supplied USDT power  
supply adapter.  
Solving Diskette Problems  
Common causes and solutions for diskette problems are listed in the following table.  
NOTE: You may need to reconfigure the computer when you add or remove hardware, such as an  
additional diskette drive. See Solving Hardware Installation Problems on page 237 for instructions.  
Table D-3 Solving Diskette Problems  
Diskette drive light stays on.  
Cause  
Solution  
Diskette is damaged.  
In Microsoft Windows XP, right-click Start, click Explore, and  
select a drive. Select File > Properties > Tools. Under Error-  
checking click Check Now.  
In Microsoft Windows Vista, right-click Start, click Explore,  
and right-click on a drive. Select Properties then select the  
Tools tab. Under Error-checking click Check Now.  
Diskette is incorrectly inserted.  
Remove diskette and reinsert.  
Drive cable is not properly connected.  
Reconnect drive cable. Ensure that all four pins on the diskette  
power cable are connected to the drive.  
Solving Diskette Problems 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-3 Solving Diskette Problems (continued)  
Drive not found.  
Cause  
Solution  
Cable is loose.  
Reseat diskette drive data and power cable.  
Reseat the drive.  
Removable drive is not seated properly.  
The device has been hidden in Computer Setup.  
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available  
is selected for the Legacy Diskette in Security > Device  
Security.  
Diskette drive cannot write to a diskette.  
Cause  
Solution  
Diskette is not formatted.  
Format the diskette.  
1. From Windows Explorer select the disk (A) drive.  
2. Right-click the drive letter and select Format.  
3. Select the desired options, and click Start to begin  
formatting the diskette.  
Diskette is write-protected.  
Use another diskette or remove the write protection.  
Check the drive letter in the path statement.  
1. Use another diskette.  
Writing to the wrong drive.  
Not enough space is left on the diskette.  
2. Delete unneeded files from diskette.  
Legacy diskette writes are disabled in Computer Setup.  
Diskette is damaged.  
Enter Computer Setup and enable Legacy Diskette Write  
in Storage > Storage Options.  
Replace the damaged disk.  
Cannot format diskette.  
Cause  
Solution  
Invalid media reported.  
When formatting a disk in MS-DOS, you may need to specify  
diskette capacity. For example, to format a 1.44-MB diskette,  
type the following command at the MS-DOS prompt:  
FORMAT A: /F:1440  
Disk may be write-protected.  
Open the locking device on the diskette.  
Legacy diskette writes are disabled in Computer Setup.  
Enter Computer Setup and enable Legacy Diskette Write  
in Storage > Storage Options.  
224 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table D-3 Solving Diskette Problems (continued)  
A problem has occurred with a disk transaction.  
Cause  
Solution  
The directory structure is bad, or there is a problem with a file. In Microsoft Windows XP, right-click Start, click Explore, and  
select a drive. Select File > Properties > Tools. Under Error-  
checking, click Check Now.  
In Microsoft Windows Vista, right-click Start, click Explore,  
and right-click on a drive. Select Properties then select the  
Tools tab. Under Error-checking click Check Now.  
Diskette drive cannot read a diskette.  
Cause  
Solution  
You are using the wrong diskette type for the drive type.  
Check the type of drive that you are using and use the correct  
diskette type.  
You are reading the wrong drive.  
Diskette is damaged.  
Check the drive letter in the path statement.  
Replace the diskette with a new one.  
“Invalid system disk” message is displayed.  
Cause  
Solution  
A diskette that does not contain the system files needed to start When drive activity stops, remove the diskette and press the  
the computer has been inserted in the drive.  
Spacebar. The computer should start up.  
Diskette error has occurred.  
Restart the computer by pressing the power button.  
Cannot Boot to Diskette.  
Cause  
Solution  
Diskette is not bootable.  
Replace with a bootable diskette.  
Diskette boot has been disabled in Computer Setup.  
1. Run Computer Setup and enable diskette boot in  
Storage > Boot Order.  
2. Run Computer Setup and enable diskette boot in  
Storage > Storage Options > Removable Media  
Boot.  
NOTE: Both steps should be used as the Removable Media  
Boot function in Computer Setup overrides the Boot Order  
enable command.  
Network server mode is enabled in Computer Setup.  
Run Computer Setup and disable Network Server Mode in  
Security > Password Options.  
Removable media boot has been disabled in Computer Setup. Run Computer Setup and enable Removable Media Boot in  
Storage > Storage Options > Removable Media Boot.  
Solving Diskette Problems 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Solving Hard Drive Problems  
Table D-4 Solving Hard Drive Problems  
Hard drive error occurs.  
Cause  
Solution  
Hard disk has bad sectors or has failed.  
1. In Microsoft Windows XP, right-click Start, click  
Explore, and select a drive. Select File > Properties >  
Tools. Under Error-checking, click Check Now.  
In Microsoft Windows Vista, right-click Start, click  
Explore, and right-click on a drive. Select  
Properties then select the Tools tab. Under Error-  
checking click Check Now.  
2. Use a utility to locate and block usage of bad sectors. If  
necessary, reformat the hard disk.  
Disk transaction problem.  
Cause  
Solution  
Either the directory structure is bad or there is a problem with In Microsoft Windows XP, right-click Start, click Explore, and  
a file.  
select a drive. Select File > Properties > Tools. Under Error-  
checking, click Check Now.  
In Microsoft Windows Vista, right-click Start, click Explore,  
and right-click on a drive. Select Properties then select the  
Tools tab. Under Error-checking click Check Now.  
Drive not found (identified).  
Cause  
Solution  
Cable could be loose.  
Check cable connections.  
The system may not have automatically recognized a newly  
installed device.  
See reconfiguration directions in the Solving Hardware  
Installation Problems on page 237 section. If the system still  
does not recognize the new device, check to see if the device  
is listed within Computer Setup. If it is listed, the probable  
cause is a driver problem. If it is not listed, the probable cause  
is a hardware problem.  
If this is a newly installed drive, run the Computer Setup utility  
and try adding a POST delay under Advanced > Power-On.  
The device is attached to a SATA port that has been hidden in Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available  
Computer Setup.  
is selected for the device's SATA port in Security > Device  
Security.  
Drive responds slowly immediately after power-up.  
Run Computer Setup and increase the POST Delay in  
Advanced > Power-On Options.  
226 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-4 Solving Hard Drive Problems (continued)  
Nonsystem disk/NTLDR missing message.  
Cause  
Solution  
The system is trying to start from a diskette that is not bootable. Remove the diskette from the diskette drive.  
The system is trying to start from the hard drive but the hard  
drive may have been damaged.  
1. Insert a bootable diskette into the diskette drive and  
restart the computer.  
2. Check the hard drive format using fdisk: If NTFS  
formatting, use a third party reader to evaluate the drive.  
If FAT32 formatting, the hard drive cannot be accessed.  
System files missing or not properly installed.  
1. Insert a bootable diskette into the diskette drive and  
restart the computer.  
2. Check the hard drive format using Fdisk: If NFTFS  
formatting, use a third party reader to evaluate the drive.  
If FAT32 formatting, the hard drive cannot be accessed.  
3. Install system files for the appropriate operating system.  
Hard drive boot has been disabled in Computer Setup.  
Run the Computer Setup utility and enable the hard drive entry  
in the Storage > Boot Order list.  
Bootable hard drive is not attached as first in a multi-hard drive If attempting to boot from a hard drive, ensure it is attached to  
configuration.  
the system board connector labeled P60 SATA 0.  
Bootable hard drive's controller is not listed first in the Boot  
Order.  
Run the Computer Setup utility and select Storage > Boot  
Order and ensure the bootable hard drive's controller is listed  
immediately under the Hard Drive entry.  
Computer will not boot from hard drive.  
Cause  
Solution  
The device is attached to a SATA port that has been hidden in Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available  
Computer Setup.  
is selected for the device's SATA port in Security > Device  
Security.  
Boot order is not correct.  
Run the Computer Setup utility and change boot sequence  
in Storage > Boot Order.  
Hard Drive's "Emulation Type" is set to "None."  
Run the Computer Setup utility and change the "Emulation  
Type" to "Hard Disk" in the device's details under Storage >  
Device Configuration.  
Hard drive is damaged.  
Observe if the front panel Power LED is blinking RED and if  
any beeps are heard. See POST Error Messages  
on page 205 to determine possible causes for the blinking red  
and beep codes.  
See the Worldwide Limited Warranty for terms and conditions.  
Computer seems to be locked up.  
Cause  
Solution  
Program in use has stopped responding to commands.  
Attempt the normal Windows “Shut Down” procedure. If this  
fails, press the power button for four or more seconds to turn  
Solving Hard Drive Problems 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table D-4 Solving Hard Drive Problems (continued)  
Computer seems to be locked up.  
Cause  
Solution  
off the power. To restart the computer, press the power button  
again.  
The removable hard drive has no power to the hard drive enclosure.  
Cause  
Solution  
The lock on the enclosure is not turned to the “ON” position.  
Insert the key and turn the lock clockwise 90 degrees. The  
green LED on the front of the enclosure should be on.  
Power cable from the computer power supply to the enclosure Check the power supply to make sure it is properly connected  
frame is not properly connected. to the rear of the enclosure frame.  
The removable hard drive is not recognized by the computer.  
Cause  
Solution  
The removable hard drive carrier is not fully seated in the  
enclosure frame or the hard drive is not fully seated in the  
carrier.  
Push the carrier into the enclosure frame so that the connector  
on the rear of the frame is properly seated. If this does not solve  
the problem, turn off the computer, remove the carrier, and  
check to see if the connector on the hard drive is properly  
seated in the carrier.  
The removable hard drive enclosure is beeping and the green LED is flashing.  
Cause Solution  
Fan failure alarm on the removable hard drive enclosure has Shut down the computer and contact HP for a replacement  
been activated. enclosure.  
Solving Media Card Reader Problems  
Table D-5 Solving Media Card Reader Problems  
Media card will not work in a digital camera after formatting it in Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft Windows Vista.  
Cause  
Solution  
By default, Windows XP and Windows Vista will format any  
Either format the media card in the digital camera or select FAT  
media card with a capacity greater than 32MB with the FAT32 file system to format the media card in a computer with  
format. Most digital cameras use the FAT (FAT16 & FAT12)  
format and can not operate with a FAT32 formatted card.  
Windows XP or Windows Vista.  
228 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-5 Solving Media Card Reader Problems (continued)  
A write-protected or locked error occurs when attempting to write to the media card.  
Cause  
Solution  
Media card is locked. Locking the media card is a safety feature If using an SD card, make sure that the lock tab located on the  
that prevents writing to and deleting from an SD/Memory Stick/ right of the SD card is not in the locked position. If using a  
PRO card.  
Memory Stick/PRO card, make sure that the lock tab located  
on the bottom of the Memory Stick/PRO card is not in the  
locked position.  
Can not write to the media card.  
Cause  
Solution  
The media card is a read-only memory (ROM) card.  
Check the manufacturer’s documentation included with your  
card to see if it writable. Refer to the previous section for a list  
of compatible cards.  
Unable to access data on the media card after inserting it into a slot.  
Cause Solution  
The media card is not inserted properly, is inserted in the wrong Ensure that the card is inserted properly with the gold contact  
slot, or is not supported.  
on the correct side. The green LED will light if inserted properly.  
Do not know how to remove a media card correctly.  
Cause  
Solution  
The computer’s software is used to safely eject the card.  
Open My Computer (Windows XP) or Computer (Windows  
Vista), right-click on the corresponding drive icon, and select  
Eject. Then pull the card out of the slot.  
NOTE: Never remove the card when the green LED is  
flashing  
After installing the media card reader and booting to Windows, the reader and the inserted cards are not recognized  
by the computer.  
Cause  
Solution  
The operating system needs time to recognize the device if the Wait a few seconds so that the operating system can recognize  
reader was just installed into the computer and you are turning the reader and the available ports, and then recognize  
the PC on for the first time.  
whatever media is inserted in the reader.  
After inserting a media card in the reader, the computer attempts to boot from the media card.  
Cause  
Solution  
The inserted media card has boot capability.  
If you do not want to boot from the media card, remove it during  
boot or do not select the option to boot from the inserted media  
card during the boot process.  
Solving Media Card Reader Problems 229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Solving Display Problems  
If you encounter display problems, see the documentation that came with the monitor and to the common  
causes and solutions listed in the following table.  
Table D-6 Solving Display Problems  
Blank screen (no video).  
Cause  
Solution  
Monitor is not turned on and the monitor light is not on.  
Bad monitor.  
Turn on the monitor and check that the monitor light is on.  
Try a different monitor.  
The cable connections are not correct.  
Check the cable connection from the monitor to the computer  
and to the electrical outlet.  
You may have a screen blanking utility installed or energy  
saver features are enabled.  
Press any key or click the mouse button and, if set, type your  
password.  
System ROM is corrupted; system is running is Boot Block  
Emergency Recovery Mode (indicated by eight beeps).  
Reflash the system ROM with the latest BIOS image. See the  
“Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode” section of the  
Desktop Management Guide for more information  
You are using a fixed-sync monitor and it will not sync at the  
resolution chosen.  
Be sure that the monitor can accept the same horizontal scan  
rate as the resolution chosen.  
Computer is in standby mode.  
Press the power button to resume from standby mode.  
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby mode,  
do not hold down the power button for more than four seconds.  
Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you will lose any  
unsaved data.  
Monitor cable is plugged into the wrong connector.  
If the computer system has both an integrated graphics  
connector and an add-in graphics card connector, plug the  
monitor cable into the graphics card connector on the back of  
the computer.  
Monitor settings in the computer are not compatible with the  
monitor.  
1. In Windows XP Control Panel, double-click the Display  
icon and select the Settings tab.  
In Windows Vista Control Panel, under Appearance and  
Personalization, select Adjust screen resolution.  
2. Use the sliding control to reset the resolution.  
Cannot enable integrated graphics after installing a PCI Express graphics card.  
Cause  
Solution  
On systems with Intel integrated graphics, the integrated  
The integrated graphics can be enabled in Computer Setup if  
graphics cannot be enabled after installing a PCI Express x16. a PCI or PCI Express x1 graphics card is installed, but it cannot  
be enabled if there is a graphics card in the PCI Express x16  
slot.  
230 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-6 Solving Display Problems (continued)  
Blank screen and the power LED flashes Red five times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the  
computer beeps five times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)  
Cause  
Solution  
Pre-video memory error.  
1. Reseat DIMMs. Power on the system.  
2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate the faulty module.  
3. Replace third-party memory with HP memory.  
4. Replace the system board.  
Blank screen and the power LED flashes Red six times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the  
computer beeps six times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)  
Cause  
Solution  
Pre-video graphics error.  
For systems with a graphics card:  
1. Reseat the graphics card. Power on the system.  
2. Replace the graphics card.  
3. Replace the system board.  
For systems with integrated graphics, replace the system  
board.  
Blank screen and the power LED flashes Red seven times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and  
the computer beeps seven times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)  
Cause  
Solution  
System board failure (ROM detected failure prior to video).  
Replace the system board.  
Monitor does not function properly when used with energy saver features.  
Cause  
Solution  
Monitor without energy saver capabilities is being used with  
energy saver features enabled.  
Disable monitor energy saver feature.  
Dim characters.  
Cause  
Solution  
The brightness and contrast controls are not set properly.  
Cables are not properly connected.  
Adjust the monitor brightness and contrast controls.  
Check that the graphics cable is securely connected to the  
graphics card and the monitor.  
Solving Display Problems 231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table D-6 Solving Display Problems (continued)  
Blurry video or requested resolution cannot be set.  
Cause  
Solution  
If the graphics controller was upgraded, the correct graphics  
drivers may not be loaded.  
Install the video drivers included in the upgrade kit.  
Monitor is not capable of displaying requested resolution.  
Graphics card is bad.  
Change requested resolution.  
Replace the graphics card.  
The picture is broken up, rolls, jitters, or flashes.  
Cause  
Solution  
The monitor connections may be incomplete or the monitor  
may be incorrectly adjusted.  
1. Be sure the monitor cable is securely connected to the  
computer.  
2. In a two-monitor system or if another monitor is in close  
proximity, be sure the monitors are not interfering with  
each other’s electromagnetic field by moving them apart.  
3. Fluorescent lights or fans may be too close to the monitor.  
Monitor needs to be degaussed.  
Degauss the monitor. Refer to the documentation that came  
with the monitor for instructions.  
Image is not centered.  
Cause  
Solution  
Position may need adjustment.  
Press the monitor's Menu button to access the OSD menu.  
Select ImageControl/ Horizontal Position or Vertical  
Position to adjust the horizontal or vertical position of the  
image.  
“No Connection, Check Signal Cable” displays on screen.  
Cause  
Solution  
Monitor video cable is disconnected.  
Connect the video cable between the monitor and computer.  
CAUTION: Ensure that the computer power is off while  
connecting the video cable.  
“Out of Range” displays on screen.  
Cause  
Solution  
Video resolution and refresh rate are set higher than what the Restart the computer and enter Safe Mode. Change the  
monitor supports.  
settings to a supported setting then restart the computer so that  
the new settings take effect.  
232 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table D-6 Solving Display Problems (continued)  
Vibrating or rattling noise coming from inside a CRT monitor when powered on.  
Cause  
Solution  
Monitor degaussing coil has been activated.  
None. It is normal for the degaussing coil to be activated when  
the monitor is powered on.  
Clicking noise coming from inside a CRT monitor.  
Cause  
Solution  
Electronic relays have been activated inside the monitor.  
None. It is normal for some monitors to make a clicking noise  
when turned on and off, when going in and out of standby  
mode, and when changing resolutions.  
High pitched noise coming from inside a flat panel monitor.  
Cause  
Solution  
Brightness and/or contrast settings are too high.  
Lower brightness and/or contrast settings.  
Fuzzy focus; streaking, ghosting, or shadowing effects; horizontal scrolling lines; faint vertical bars; or unable to  
center the picture on the screen (flat panel monitors using an analog VGA input connection only).  
Cause  
Solution  
Flat panel monitor’s internal digital conversion circuits may be 1. Select the monitor’s Auto-Adjustment option in the  
unable to correctly interpret the output synchronization of the  
graphics card.  
monitor’s on-screen display menu.  
2. Manually synchronize the Clock and Clock Phase on-  
screen display functions. To download a SoftPaq that will  
assist you with the synchronization, go to the following  
Web site, select the appropriate monitor, and download  
either SP32347 or SP32202: http://www.hp.com/support  
Graphics card is not seated properly or is bad.  
1. Reseat the graphics card.  
2. Replace the graphics card.  
Certain typed symbols do not appear correct.  
Cause  
Solution  
The font you are using does not support that particular symbol. Use the Character Map to locate the and select the appropriate  
symbol. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > System  
Tools > Character Map. You can copy the symbol from the  
Character Map into a document.  
Solving Audio Problems  
If the computer has audio features and you encounter audio problems, see the common causes and  
solutions listed in the following table.  
Solving Audio Problems 233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-7 Solving Audio Problems  
Sound cuts in and out.  
Cause  
Solution  
Processor resources are being used by other open  
applications.  
Shut down all open processor-intensive applications.  
Direct sound latency, common in many media player  
applications.  
In Windows XP only:  
1. From the Control Panel, select Sounds and Audio  
Devices.  
2. On the Audio tab, select a device from the Sound  
Playback list.  
3. Click the Advanced button and select the Performance  
tab.  
4. Set the Hardware acceleration slider to None and the  
Sample rate conversion quality slider to Good and  
retest the audio.  
5. Set the Hardware acceleration slider to Full and the  
Sample rate conversion quality slider to Best and  
retest the audio.  
Sound does not come out of the speaker or headphones.  
Cause  
Solution  
Software volume control is turned down or muted.  
Double-click the Speaker icon on the taskbar, then make sure  
that Mute is not selected and use the volume slider to adjust  
the volume.  
Audio is hidden in Computer Setup.  
Enable the audio in Computer Setup: Security >  
Device Security > Audio.  
The external speakers are not turned on.  
Turn on the external speakers.  
The audio device may be connected to the wrong jack.  
Ensure that the device is connected to the correct jack on the  
computer. The speakers should be plugged into the rear line-  
out jack and the headphones should be plugged into the front  
headphone jack.  
External speakers plugged into the wrong audio jack on a  
recently installed sound card.  
See the sound card documentation for proper speaker  
connection.  
Digital CD audio is not enabled.  
Enable digital CD audio. In the Device Manager, right-click on  
the CD/DVD device and select Properties. Make sure Enable  
digital CD audio for this CD-ROM device is checked.  
Headphones or devices connected to the line-out connector  
mute the internal speaker.  
Turn on and use headphones or external speakers, if  
connected, or disconnect headphones or external speakers.  
Computer is in standby mode.  
Press the power button to resume from standby mode.  
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby mode,  
do not hold down the power button for more than four seconds.  
Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you will lose any  
unsaved data.  
Internal speaker is disabled in Computer Setup.  
Enable the internal speaker in Computer Setup. Select  
Advanced > Device Options > Internal Speaker.  
234 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table D-7 Solving Audio Problems (continued)  
Sound from headphones is not clear or muffled.  
Cause  
Solution  
Headphones are plugged into the rear audio output connector. Plug the headphones into the headphone connector on the  
The rear audio output connector is for powered audio devices front of the computer.  
and is not designed for headphone use.  
Computer appears to be locked up while recording audio.  
Cause  
Solution  
The hard disk may be full.  
Before recording, make sure there is enough free space on the  
hard disk. You can also try recording the audio file in a  
compressed format.  
Line-in jack is not functioning properly.  
Cause  
Solution  
Jack has been reconfigured in the audio driver or application In the audio driver or application software, reconfigure the jack  
software.  
or set the jack to its default value.  
Solving Printer Problems  
If you encounter printer problems, see the documentation that came with the printer and to the common  
causes and solutions listed in the following table.  
Table D-8 Solving Printer Problems  
Printer will not print.  
Cause  
Solution  
Printer is not turned on and online.  
Turn the printer on and make sure it is online.  
The correct printer drivers for the application are not installed. 1. Install the correct printer driver for the application.  
2. Try printing using the MS-DOS command:  
DIR C:\ > [printer port]  
where [printer port]is the address of the printer being  
used. If the printer works, reload the printer driver.  
If you are on a network, you may not have made the connection Make the proper network connections to the printer.  
to the printer.  
Printer may have failed.  
Run printer self-test.  
Printer will not turn on.  
Cause  
Solution  
The cables may not be connected properly.  
Reconnect all cables and check the power cord and electrical  
outlet.  
Solving Printer Problems 235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-8 Solving Printer Problems (continued)  
Printer prints garbled information.  
Cause  
Solution  
The correct printer driver for the application is not installed.  
The cables may not be connected properly.  
Printer memory may be overloaded.  
Install the correct printer driver for the application.  
Reconnect all cables.  
Reset the printer by turning it off for one minute, then turn it  
back on.  
Printer is offline.  
Cause  
Solution  
The printer may be out of paper.  
Check the paper tray and refill it if it is empty. Select online.  
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems  
If you encounter keyboard or mouse problems, see the documentation that came with the equipment  
and to the common causes and solutions listed in the following table.  
Table D-9 Solving Keyboard Problems  
Keyboard commands and typing are not recognized by the computer.  
Cause  
Solution  
Keyboard connector is not properly connected.  
1. On the Windows XP Desktop, click Start > Shut Down.  
On the Windows Vista Desktop, click Start, click the  
arrow on the lower right corner of the Start menu, then  
select Shut Down.  
2. After the shutdown is complete, reconnect the keyboard  
to the back of the computer and restart the computer.  
Program in use has stopped responding to commands.  
Shut down your computer using the mouse and then restart  
the computer.  
Keyboard needs repairs.  
Wireless device error.  
See the Worldwide Limited Warranty for terms and conditions.  
1. Check the software, if available, for device status.  
2. Check/replace device batteries.  
3. Reset receiver and keyboard.  
Computer is in standby mode.  
Press the power button to resume from standby mode.  
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby mode,  
do not hold down the power button for more than four seconds.  
Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you will lose any  
unsaved data.  
236 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-9 Solving Keyboard Problems (continued)  
Cursor will not move using the arrow keys on the keypad.  
Cause  
Solution  
The Num Lock key may be on.  
Press the Num Lock key. The Num Lock light should not be on  
if you want to use the arrow keys. The Num Lock key can be  
disabled (or enabled) in Computer Setup.  
Table D-10 Solving Mouse Problems  
Mouse does not respond to movement or is too slow.  
Cause  
Solution  
Mouse connector is not properly plugged into the back of the Shut down the computer using the keyboard.  
computer.  
1. Press the Ctrl and Esc keys at the same time (or press  
the Windows logo key) to display the Start menu.  
2. Use the arrow keys to select Shut Down and then press  
the Enter key.  
3. After the shutdown is complete, plug the mouse  
connector into the back of the computer (or the keyboard)  
and restart.  
Program in use has stopped responding to commands.  
Mouse may need cleaning.  
Shut down the computer using the keyboard then restart the  
computer.  
Remove the roller ball cover on the mouse and clean the  
internal components.  
Mouse may need repair.  
Wireless device error.  
See the Worldwide Limited Warranty for terms and conditions.  
1. Check the software, if available, for device status.  
2. Check/replace device batteries.  
3. Reset receiver and mouse.  
Computer is in standby mode.  
Press the power button to resume from standby mode.  
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby mode,  
do not hold down the power button for more than four seconds.  
Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you will lose any  
unsaved data.  
Mouse will only move vertically, horizontally, or movement is jerky.  
Cause  
Solution  
Mouse roller ball or the rotating encoder shafts that make  
contact with the ball are dirty.  
Remove roller ball cover from the bottom of the mouse and  
clean the internal components with a mouse cleaning kit  
available from most computer stores.  
Solving Hardware Installation Problems  
You may need to reconfigure the computer when you add or remove hardware, such as an additional  
drive or expansion card. If you install a plug and play device, Windows automatically recognizes the  
Solving Hardware Installation Problems 237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
device and configures the computer. If you install a non–plug and play device, you must reconfigure the  
computer after completing installation of the new hardware. In Windows, use the Add Hardware  
Wizard and follow the instructions that appear on the screen.  
WARNING! When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to the  
system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be sure  
to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to cool  
before touching.  
Table D-11 Solving Hardware Installation Problems  
A new device is not recognized as part of the system.  
Cause  
Solution  
Device is not seated or connected properly.  
Ensure that the device is properly and securely connected and  
that pins in the connector are not bent down.  
Cable(s) of new external device are loose or power cables are Ensure that all cables are properly and securely connected and  
unplugged.  
that pins in the cable or connector are not bent down.  
Power switch of new external device is not turned on.  
Turn off the computer, turn on the external device, then turn on  
the computer to integrate the device with the computer system.  
When the system advised you of changes to the configuration, Reboot the computer and follow the instructions for accepting  
you did not accept them. the changes.  
A plug and play board may not automatically configure when Use Windows Device Manager to deselect the automatic  
added if the default configuration conflicts with other devices. settings for the board and choose a basic configuration that  
does not cause a resource conflict. You can also use Computer  
Setup to reconfigure or disable devices to resolve the resource  
conflict.  
USB ports on the computer are disabled in Computer Setup. Enter Computer Setup (F10) and enable the USB ports.  
Computer will not start.  
Cause  
Solution  
Wrong memory modules were used in the upgrade or memory 1. Review the documentation that came with the system to  
modules were installed in the wrong location.  
determine if you are using the correct memory modules  
and to verify the proper installation.  
NOTE: DIMM 1 must always be installed.  
2. Observe the beeps and LED lights on the front of the  
computer. Beeps and flashing LEDs are codes for  
specific problems.  
3. If you still cannot resolve the issue, contact Customer  
Support.  
Power LED flashes Red five times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps five  
times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)  
Cause  
Solution  
Memory is installed incorrectly or is bad.  
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the DIMMs or the system  
board, you must unplug the computer power cord before  
attempting to reseat, install, or remove a DIMM module.  
238 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table D-11 Solving Hardware Installation Problems (continued)  
Power LED flashes Red five times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps five  
times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)  
Cause  
Solution  
1. Reseat DIMMs. Power on the system.  
2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate the faulty module.  
NOTE: DIMM 1 must always be installed.  
3. Replace third-party memory with HP memory.  
4. Replace the system board.  
Power LED flashes Red six times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps six  
times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)  
Cause  
Solution  
Graphics card is not seated properly or is bad, or system board For systems with a graphics card:  
is bad.  
1. Reseat the graphics card. Power on the system.  
2. Replace the graphics card.  
3. Replace the system board.  
For systems with integrated graphics, replace the system  
board.  
Power LED flashes Red ten times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps ten  
times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)  
Cause  
Solution  
Bad option card.  
1. Check each option card by removing the cards one at time  
(if multiple cards), then power on the system to see if fault  
goes away.  
2. Once bad card is identified, remove and replace bad  
option card.  
3. Replace the system board.  
Solving Network Problems  
Some common causes and solutions for network problems are listed in the following table. These  
guidelines do not discuss the process of debugging the network cabling.  
Solving Network Problems 239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-12 Solving Network Problems  
Wake-on-LAN feature is not functioning.  
Cause  
Solution  
Wake-on-LAN is not enabled.  
To enable Wake-on-LAN in Windows XP:  
1. Select Start > Control Panel.  
2. Double-click Network Connections.  
3. Double-click Local Area Connection.  
4. Click Properties.  
5. Click Configure.  
6. Click the Power Management tab, then select the check  
box to Allow this device to bring the computer out of  
standby.  
To enable Wake-on-LAN in Windows Vista:  
1. Select Start > Control Panel.  
2. Under Network and Internet, select View network  
status and tasks.  
3. In the Tasks list, select Manage network connections.  
4. Double-click Local Area Connection.  
5. Click the Properties button.  
6. Click the Configure button.  
7. Click the Power Management tab, then select the check  
box to Allow this device to wake the computer.  
Network driver does not detect network controller.  
Cause  
Solution  
Network controller is disabled.  
1. Run Computer Setup and enable network controller.  
2. Enable the network controller in the operating system via  
Device Manager.  
Incorrect network driver.  
Check the network controller documentation for the correct  
driver or obtain the latest driver from the manufacturer’s Web  
site.  
Network status link light never flashes.  
NOTE: The network status light is supposed to flash when there is network activity.  
Cause  
Solution  
No active network is detected.  
Check cabling and network equipment for proper connection.  
240 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-12 Solving Network Problems (continued)  
Network status link light never flashes.  
NOTE: The network status light is supposed to flash when there is network activity.  
Cause  
Solution  
Network controller is not set up properly.  
Check for the device status within Windows, such as Device  
Manager for driver load and the Network Connections applet  
within Windows for link status.  
Network controller is disabled.  
1. Run Computer Setup and enable network controller.  
2. Enable the network controller in the operating system via  
Device Manager.  
Network driver is not properly loaded.  
System cannot autosense the network.  
Reinstall network drivers.  
Disable auto-sensing capabilities and force the system into the  
correct operating mode.  
Diagnostics reports a failure.  
Cause  
Solution  
The cable is not securely connected.  
Ensure that the cable is securely attached to the network  
connector and that the other end of the cable is securely  
attached to the correct device.  
The cable is attached to the incorrect connector.  
Ensure that the cable is attached to the correct connector.  
There is a problem with the cable or a device at the other end Ensure that the cable and device at the other end are operating  
of the cable. correctly.  
Network controller interrupt is shared with an expansion board. Under the Computer Setup Advanced menu, change the  
resource settings for the board.  
The network controller is defective.  
Contact an authorized service provider.  
Diagnostics passes, but the computer does not communicate with the network.  
Cause  
Solution  
Network drivers are not loaded, or driver parameters do not  
match current configuration.  
Make sure the network drivers are loaded and that the driver  
parameters match the configuration of the network controller.  
Make sure the correct network client and protocol is installed.  
The network controller is not configured for this computer.  
Select the Network icon in the Control Panel and configure  
the network controller.  
Network controller stopped working when an expansion board was added to the computer.  
Cause Solution  
Network controller interrupt is shared with an expansion board. Under the Computer Setup Advanced menu, change the  
resource settings for the board.  
Solving Network Problems 241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table D-12 Solving Network Problems (continued)  
Network controller stopped working when an expansion board was added to the computer.  
Cause  
Solution  
The network controller requires drivers.  
Verify that the drivers were not accidentally deleted when the  
drivers for a new expansion board were installed.  
The expansion board installed is a network card (NIC) and  
conflicts with the embedded NIC.  
Under the Computer Setup Advanced menu, change the  
resource settings for the board.  
Network controller stops working without apparent cause.  
Cause  
Solution  
The files containing the network drivers are corrupted.  
Reinstall the network drivers, using the Recovery Disc Set  
created from the hard drive's Recovery Partition.  
The cable is not securely connected.  
The network controller is defective.  
Ensure that the cable is securely attached to the network  
connector and that the other end of the cable is securely  
attached to the correct device.  
Contact an authorized service provider.  
New network card will not boot.  
Cause  
Solution  
New network card may be defective or may not meet industry- Install a working, industry-standard NIC, or change the boot  
standard specifications. sequence to boot from another source.  
Cannot connect to network server when attempting Remote System Installation.  
Cause  
Solution  
The network controller is not configured properly.  
Verify Network Connectivity, that a DHCP Server is present,  
and that the Remote System Installation Server contains the  
NIC drivers for your NIC.  
System setup utility reports unprogrammed EEPROM.  
Cause  
Solution  
Unprogrammed EEPROM.  
Contact an authorized service provider.  
Solving Memory Problems  
If you encounter memory problems, some common causes and solutions are listed in the following table.  
242 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION: Power may still be supplied to the DIMMs when the computer is turned off (depending on  
the Management Engine (ME) settings). To avoid damage to the DIMMs or the system board, you must  
unplug the computer power cord before attempting to reseat, install, or remove a DIMM module.  
For those systems that support ECC memory, HP does not support mixing ECC and non-ECC memory.  
Otherwise, the computer will not boot the operating system.  
NOTE: The memory count will be affected by configurations with the Management Engine (ME)  
enabled. The ME uses 8MB of system memory in single channel mode or 16MB of memory in dual-  
channel mode to download, decompress, and execute the ME firmware for Out-of-Band (OOB), third-  
party data storage, and other management functions.  
Table D-13 Solving Memory Problems  
System will not boot or does not function properly after installing additional memory modules.  
Cause  
Solution  
A memory module is not installed in the XMM1 (or DIMM1)  
socket.  
Ensure that a memory module is installed in the black XMM1  
(or DIMM1) socket on the system board. This socket must be  
populated with a memory module.  
Memory module is not the correct type or speed grade for the Replace module with the correct industry-standard device for  
system or the new memory module is not seated properly.  
the computer. On some models, ECC and non-ECC memory  
modules cannot be mixed.  
Out of memory error.  
Cause  
Solution  
Memory configuration may not be set up correctly.  
You have run out of memory to run the application.  
Use the Device Manager to check memory configuration.  
Check the application documentation to determine the memory  
requirements.  
Memory count during POST is wrong.  
Cause  
Solution  
The memory modules may not be installed correctly.  
Check that the memory modules have been installed correctly  
and that proper modules are used.  
Integrated graphics may use system memory.  
No action required.  
Insufficient memory error during operation.  
Cause  
Solution  
Too many Terminate and Stay Resident programs (TSRs) are Delete any TSRs that you do not need.  
installed.  
You have run out of memory for the application.  
Check the memory requirements for the application or add  
more memory to the computer.  
Solving Memory Problems 243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table D-13 Solving Memory Problems (continued)  
Power LED flashes Red five times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps five  
times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)  
Cause  
Solution  
Memory is installed incorrectly or is bad.  
1. Reseat DIMMs. Power on the system.  
2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate the faulty module.  
3. Replace third-party memory with HP memory.  
4. Replace the system board.  
Solving Processor Problems  
If you encounter processor problems, common causes and solutions are listed in the following table.  
Table D-14 Solving Processor Problems  
Poor performance is experienced.  
Cause  
Solution  
Processor is hot.  
1. Make sure the airflow to the computer is not blocked.  
2. Make sure the fans are connected and working properly  
(some fans only operate when needed).  
3. Make sure the processor heatsink is installed properly.  
Power LED flashes Red three times, once every second, followed by a two second pause.  
Cause  
Solution  
Processor is not seated properly or not installed.  
1. Check to see that the processor is present.  
2. Reseat the processor.  
Power LED flashes Red eleven times, once every second, followed by a two second pause.  
Cause  
Solution  
The current processor does not support a feature previously  
enabled on this system.  
1. Install a TXT capable processor.  
2. Disable TXT in the Computer Setup (F10) utility.  
3. Reinstall the original processor.  
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems  
If you encounter CD-ROM or DVD problems, see the common causes and solutions listed in the  
following table or to the documentation that came with the optional device.  
244 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Table D-15 Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems  
System will not boot from CD-ROM or DVD drive.  
Cause  
Solution  
The device is attached to a SATA port that has been hidden in Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available  
the Computer Setup utility.  
is selected for the device's SATA port in Security > Device  
Security.  
Removable Media Boot is disabled in the Computer Setup  
utility.  
Run the Computer Setup utility and enable booting to  
removable media in Storage > Storage Options. Ensure CD-  
ROM is enabled in Storage > Boot Order.  
Network Server Mode is enabled in Computer Setup.  
Run the Computer Setup utility and disable Network Server  
Mode in Security > Password Options.  
Non-bootable CD in drive.  
Boot order not correct.  
Try a bootable CD in the drive.  
Run the Computer Setup utility and change boot sequence  
in Storage > Boot Order.  
Drive not found (identified).  
Cause  
Solution  
Cable could be loose.  
Check cable connections.  
The system may not have automatically recognized a newly  
installed device.  
See reconfiguration directions in the Solving Hardware  
Installation Problems on page 237 section. If the system still  
does not recognize the new device, check to see if the device  
is listed within Computer Setup. If it is listed, the probable  
cause is a driver problem. If it is not listed, the probable cause  
is a hardware problem.  
If this is a newly installed drive, run the Computer Setup utility  
and try adding a POST delay under Advanced > Power-On.  
The device is attached to a SATA port that has been hidden in Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available  
Computer Setup.  
is selected for the device's SATA port in Security > Device  
Security.  
Drive responds slowly immediately after power-up.  
Run Computer Setup and increase the POST Delay in  
Advanced > Power-On Options.  
CD-ROM or DVD devices are not detected or driver is not loaded.  
Cause  
Solution  
Drive is not connected properly or not properly configured.  
See the documentation that came with the optional device.  
Movie will not play in the DVD drive.  
Cause  
Solution  
Movie may be regionalized for a different country.  
Decoder software is not installed.  
Damaged media.  
See the documentation that came with the DVD drive.  
Install decoder software.  
Replace media.  
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems 245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table D-15 Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems (continued)  
Movie will not play in the DVD drive.  
Cause  
Solution  
Movie rating locked out by parental lock.  
Media installed upside down.  
Use DVD software to remove parental lock.  
Reinstall media.  
Cannot eject compact disc (tray-load unit).  
Cause  
Solution  
Disc not properly seated in the drive.  
Turn off the computer and insert a thin metal rod into the  
emergency eject hole and push firmly. Slowly pull the tray out  
from the drive until the tray is fully extended, then remove  
the disc.  
CD-ROM, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, or DVD-R/RW drive cannot read a disc or takes too long to start.  
Cause  
Solution  
Media has been inserted upside down.  
Re-insert the Media with the label facing up.  
The DVD-ROM drive takes longer to start because it has to  
determine the type of media played, such as audio or video.  
Wait at least 30 seconds to let the DVD-ROM drive determine  
the type of media being played. If the disc still does not start,  
read the other solutions listed for this topic.  
CD or DVD disc is dirty.  
Clean CD or DVD with a CD cleaning kit, available from most  
computer stores.  
Windows does not detect the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive.  
1. Use Device Manager to remove or uninstall the device.  
2. Restart the computer and let Windows detect the CD or  
DVD driver.  
Recording or copying CDs is difficult or impossible.  
Cause  
Solution  
Wrong or poor quality media type.  
1. Try using a slower speed when recording.  
2. Verify that you are using the correct media for the drive.  
3. Try a different brand of media. Quality varies widely  
between manufacturers.  
USDT computer boots too slow after removing a CD-ROM or DVD drive.  
Cause Solution  
The system is searching for the drive during boot because the Disconnect the drive cable from the system board.  
drive cable is still attached to the system board.  
246 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Solving Drive Key Problems  
If you encounter Drive Key problems, common causes and solutions are listed in the following table.  
Table D-16 Solving Drive Key Problems  
USB Drive Key is not seen as a drive letter in Windows.  
Cause  
Solution  
The drive letter after the last physical drive is not available.  
Change the default drive letter for the Drive Key in Windows.  
USB Drive Key not found (identified).  
Cause  
Solution  
The device is attached to a USB port that has been hidden in Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure that "Device  
Computer Setup.  
available" is selected for "All USB Ports" and "Front USB Ports"  
under Security > Device Security.  
The device was not properly seated before power-up.  
Ensure the device is fully inserted into the USB port before  
applying power to the system  
System will not boot from USB Drive Key.  
Cause  
Solution  
Boot order is not correct.  
Run the Computer Setup utility and change boot sequence  
in Storage > Boot Order.  
Removable Media Boot is disabled in the Computer Setup  
utility.  
Run the Computer Setup utility and enable booting to  
removable media in Storage > Storage Options. Ensure USB  
is enabled in Storage > Boot Order.  
The image on the device is not bootable.  
Follow the procedures described in the "ROM Flash:  
Replicating the Setup: Creating a Bootable Device: Supported  
USB Flash Media Device" section of the Service Reference  
Guide.  
The computer boots to DOS after making a bootable Drive Key.  
Cause  
Solution  
Install the Drive Key only after the operating system boots.  
Drive Key is bootable.  
Solving Front Panel Component Problems  
If you encounter problems with devices connected to the front panel, refer to the common causes and  
solutions listed in the following table.  
Solving Drive Key Problems 247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Table D-17 Solving Front Panel Component Problems  
A USB device, headphone, or microphone is not recognized by the computer.  
Cause  
Solution  
Device is not properly connected.  
1. Turn off the computer.  
2. Reconnect the device to the front of the computer and  
restart the computer.  
The device does not have power.  
If the USB device requires AC power, be sure one end is  
connected to the device and one end is connected to a live  
outlet.  
The correct device driver is not installed.  
The cable from the device to the computer does not work.  
The device is not working.  
1. Install the correct driver for the device.  
2. You might need to reboot the computer.  
1. If possible, replace the cable.  
2. Restart the computer.  
1. Replace the device.  
2. Restart the computer.  
USB ports on the computer are disabled in Computer Setup. Enter Computer Setup (F10) and enable the USB ports.  
Solving Internet Access Problems  
If you encounter Internet access problems, consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or refer to the  
common causes and solutions listed in the following table.  
Table D-18 Solving Internet Access Problems  
Unable to connect to the Internet.  
Cause  
Solution  
Internet Service Provider (ISP) account is not set up properly. Verify Internet settings or contact your ISP for assistance.  
Modem is not set up properly.  
Reconnect the modem. Verify the connections are correct  
using the quick setup documentation.  
Web browser is not set up properly.  
Cable/DSL modem is not plugged in.  
Verify that the Web browser is installed and set up to work with  
your ISP.  
Plug in cable/DSL modem. You should see a “power” LED light  
on the front of the cable/DSL modem.  
Cable/DSL service is not available or has been interrupted due Try connecting to the Internet at a later time or contact your  
to bad weather.  
ISP. (If the cable/DSL service is connected, the “cable” LED  
light on the front of the cable/DSL modem will be on.)  
The CAT5 UTP cable is disconnected.  
Connect the CAT5 UTP cable between the cable modem and  
the computers’s RJ-45 connector. (If the connection is good,  
the “PC” LED light on the front of the cable/DSL modem will be  
on.)  
248 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-18 Solving Internet Access Problems (continued)  
Unable to connect to the Internet.  
Cause  
Solution  
IP address is not configured properly.  
Contact your ISP for the correct IP address.  
Windows Vista  
Cookies are corrupted. (A “cookie” is a small piece of  
information that a Web server can store temporarily with the  
Web browser. This is useful for having the browser remember  
some specific information that the Web server can later  
retrieve.)  
1. Select Start > Control Panel.  
2. Click Network and Internet.  
3. Click Internet Options.  
4. In the Browsing history section on the General tab, click  
the Delete button.  
5. Click the Delete cookies button.  
Windows XP  
1. Select Start > Control Panel.  
2. Double-click Internet Options.  
3. On the General tab, click the Delete Cookies button.  
Cannot automatically launch Internet programs.  
Cause  
Solution  
You must log on to your ISP before some programs will start. Log on to your ISP and launch the desired program.  
Internet takes too long to download Web sites.  
Cause  
Solution  
Modem is not set up properly.  
Verify that the modem is connected and communicating  
properly.  
Windows XP  
1. Select Start > Control Panel.  
2. Double-click System.  
3. Click the Hardware tab.  
4. In the Device Manager area, click the Device Manager  
button.  
5. Double-click Modems.  
6. Double-click Agere Systems PCI-SV92PP Soft  
Modem.  
7. On the General tab, click Diagnostics.  
8. Click Query Modem. A “Success” response indicates the  
modem is connected and working properly.  
Windows Vista  
Solving Internet Access Problems 249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table D-18 Solving Internet Access Problems (continued)  
Internet takes too long to download Web sites.  
Cause  
Solution  
1. Select Start > Control Panel.  
2. Click on System and Maintenance.  
3. Click on System.  
4. In the Tasks list, select Device Manager.  
5. Double-click Modems.  
6. Double-click Agere Systems PCI-SV92PP Soft  
Modem.  
7. On the General tab, click Diagnostics.  
8. Click Query Modem. A “Success” response indicates the  
modem is connected and working properly.  
Solving Software Problems  
Most software problems occur as a result of the following:  
The application was not installed or configured correctly.  
There is insufficient memory available to run the application.  
There is a conflict between applications.  
Be sure that all the needed device drivers have been installed.  
If you have installed an operating system other than the factory-installed operating system, check  
to be sure it is supported on the system.  
If you encounter software problems, see the applicable solutions listed in the following table.  
Table D-19 Solving Software Problems  
Computer will not continue and no HP logo screen has appeared.  
Cause  
Solution  
POST error has occurred.  
Observe the beeps and LED lights on the front of the computer.  
See POST Error Messages on page 205 to determine possible  
causes.  
See the Restore Kit or the Worldwide Limited Warranty for  
terms and conditions.  
Computer will not continue after HP logo screen has appeared.  
Cause  
Solution  
Use recovery diskette to scan hard drive for errors.  
System files may be damaged.  
250 Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table D-19 Solving Software Problems (continued)  
“Illegal Operation has Occurred” error message is displayed.  
Cause  
Solution  
Software being used is not Microsoft-certified for your version Verify that the software is certified by Microsoft for your version  
of Windows.  
of Windows (see program packaging for this information).  
Configuration files are corrupt.  
If possible, save all data, close all programs, and restart the  
computer.  
Contacting Customer Support  
For help and service, contact an authorized reseller or dealer. To locate a reseller or dealer near you,  
NOTE: If you take the computer to an authorized reseller, dealer, or service provider for service,  
remember to provide the setup and power-on passwords if they are set.  
Refer to the number listed in the warranty or in the Support Telephone Numbers guide for technical  
assistance.  
Contacting Customer Support 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
E System Board and Riser Board  
Reference Designators  
These reference designators are used on most but not all HP system and riser boards.  
Designator  
BAT  
Component  
Battery socket/Battery  
LED - 5V_Aux (on)  
Health-LED  
CR1  
CR2  
CR3  
CR4  
CR35  
E14  
UID LED  
Power LED  
Hard drive activity LED  
Boot block header/jumper  
Boot block recovery header  
ROM recovery header  
CPLD programming header  
Clear Password header/jumper  
Clear CMOS header  
RJ45 jack  
E15  
E16  
E25  
E49/JP49  
E50  
J7  
J9  
Stacked RJ45/Dual USB  
Quad stacked USB  
First IEEE 1394 connector  
Second IEEE 1394 connector  
SPDIF input  
J10  
J11  
J12  
J13  
J14  
SPDIF output  
J20 - 29  
J30  
PCI slots  
PCI extender slot (male)  
PCI Express slots  
J31 - J35  
J37  
Primary SCSI connector  
252 Appendix E System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
J38  
Secondary SCSI connector  
J39  
Stacked parallel/SCSI connector  
AGP slot  
J40  
J41  
x16 PCI Express slot for graphics  
First parallel port  
J50  
J51  
Second parallel port  
J52  
Double-stacked parallel port, Top = Port B, Bottom = Port A  
Parallel port over single Serial Port  
Parallel port over Serial Port and Video Port  
Parallel port over dual VGA ports  
DVI connector  
J53  
J54  
J55  
J65  
J66  
Keyboard connector, PS/2 (Closest to power supply)  
Mouse connector, PS/2  
J67  
J68  
Stacked mouse (Top)/keyboard (Bottom) connector  
Video connector, VGA  
J69  
J70  
Primary single USB connector  
Secondary single USB port  
J71  
J72  
Microphone jack  
J73  
Line-in jack  
J74  
Line-out jack  
J75  
Headphone jack  
J76  
Volume control  
J77  
Double-stacked headphone (Bottom)/microphone (Top) connector  
Double-stacked line-in (Top)/line-out (Bottom) connector  
Stacked serial/audio connector  
Primary double-stack USB, Top = Port 2, Bottom = Port 1  
Secondary double-stack USB, Top = Port 4, Bottom = Port 3  
Triple-stacked audio jack (line in, line out/headphone, microphone)  
Security board connector - for security card  
PCI slots on riser card  
J78  
J80  
J81  
J82  
J83  
J101  
J9020-J9029  
J9030-J9034  
JP49/E49  
L1  
PCI express slots on riser card  
Clear password header/jumper  
USB front port choke (1st)  
L2  
USB rear port choke (1st)  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L3  
USB rear port choke (2nd)  
USB rear port choke (3rd)  
L4  
L5  
USB front port choke (2nd)  
P/S connector (20 or 24 pin)  
Second P/S connector (as required)  
Processor 12V header  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
Secondary Processor 12V header  
Main Power/HDD LED connector  
Speaker connector  
P5  
P6  
P7  
Analog audio connector (from CD-ROM)  
Primary chassis fan header or primary CPU heatsink fan  
Secondary chassis fan header  
Diskette drive connector  
P8  
P9  
P10  
P11  
P12  
P13  
P15  
P16  
P17  
P18  
P19  
P20  
P21  
P22  
P23  
P24  
P25  
P26  
P27  
P29  
P30  
P40  
P41  
P52  
Auxiliary Audio connector  
Alert on LAN connector  
VRM module footprint  
AUI connector  
Fan command/fan sink header (may be 2 or 4 pin)  
Digital audio expansion header  
SPDIF internal input header  
SPDIF internal output header  
Primary IDE connector  
Secondary IDE/MultiBay connector  
Header for NEWCARD  
Header for front panel audio  
Header for front panel USB  
Internal USB connector 1  
Internal USB connector 2  
MultiBay header  
SCSI LED connector  
PCI extender slot (female)  
Blade PC graphics connector (outboard)  
Blade PC graphics connector (inboard)  
Second serial port  
254 Appendix E System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P54  
P55  
P58  
P60  
P61  
P62  
P63  
P64  
P65  
P66  
P67  
P68  
P69  
P70  
P71  
P80  
P81  
P82  
P83  
P84  
P85  
P86  
P87  
P101  
P106  
P124  
P125  
P126  
P150  
P216  
SW2  
SW50  
U2  
Primary serial port  
Double stack serial port, Top = Serial B, Bottom = Serial A  
Riser edge connector (male-mates with J30)  
PrimarySerial ATA (SATA) connector  
Second Serial ATA (SATA) connector  
Third Serial ATA (SATA) connector  
Fourth Serial ATA (SATA) connector  
VSFF expansion connector  
Graphics option connector  
Fifth Serial ATA (SATA) connector  
Sixth Serial ATA (SATA) connector  
Seventh Serial ATA (SATA) connector  
Eighth Serial ATA (SATA) connector  
Primary (CPU) fan header for fansink  
Secondary CPU fan header for fansink  
Primary Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector  
Second Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector  
Third Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector  
Fourth Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector  
Fifth Serial Attached (SAS) connector  
Sixth Serial Attached (SAS) connector  
Seventh Serial Attached (SAS) connector  
Eighth Serial Attached (SAS) connector  
Security board connector, system board  
Secondary speaker connector  
Hood lock header  
Hood sensor header  
Flying parallel port header  
Media reader header  
White box chassis fan header  
Security hood switch on riser card  
Clear CMOS switch/push button  
Single chip solution (combined northbridge/southbridge)  
North bridge  
U3  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U4  
South bridge  
U5  
Super I/O  
U6  
Clock chip  
U7  
64 bit Bridge  
U10  
LOM1  
U11  
LOM1 EEPROM  
U12  
LOM1 PHY  
U13  
Audio Codec  
U14  
Audio amplifier  
U16  
LOM2  
U17  
LOM2 EEPROM  
U18  
LOM2 PHY  
U19  
SPI ROM - SOIC-8 footprint  
Fan controller  
U20  
U21  
SPI ROM - SO16 footprint  
TMDS controller  
U29  
U30  
Parallel port diode array  
First serial port transceiver  
Second serial port transceiver  
VRM controller  
U31  
U32  
U46  
U50  
USB front port power switch  
First USB rear port power switch  
Second USB rear port power switch  
Third USB rear port power switch  
Battery retainer  
U51  
U52  
U53  
XBT  
XMM1  
XMM2 - XMM5  
XU1  
XU2  
XU15/U15  
XU19/U19  
Y1  
Memory slot. DIMM1 or RIMM1 populated and tested  
Following memory slots  
Primary processor socket  
Secondary processor socket  
System ROM and Socket (Socket = XU15, ROM = U15)  
SPI ROM and socket (XU19 = socket, U19 = SPI ROM)  
Primary (TH) system clock crystal  
Secondary (SMT) system clock crystal  
Primary NIC clock crystal  
Y2  
Y3  
256 Appendix E System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Y4  
Secondary NIC clock crystal  
RTC clock crystal/tie-down  
Y5/H5  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Symbols/Numerics  
24-pin MicroFit power pin  
assignments 198  
24-pin power pin  
assignments 197  
bezel blanks  
SFF removal and  
cable pinouts  
SATA data 49  
SATA power 49  
cautions  
replacement 115  
USDT removal and  
replacement 165  
AC power 51  
4-pin power pin assignments 198  
6-pin power pin assignments 198  
BIOS  
cables 58  
cooling fan 57  
cover lock security 45  
electrostatic discharge 53  
FailSafe Key 46  
Boot Block Emergency  
Recovery Mode 32  
HPQFlash 32  
A
access panel, locked 220  
access to computer,  
controlling 38  
Active Management Technology,  
Intel vPro-branded PCs with 29  
Altiris  
Remote ROM Flash 32  
Boot Block Emergency Recovery  
Mode 32  
boot problems 246  
bootable device  
keyboard cleaning 56  
keyboard keys 57  
protecting ROM 31  
CD-ROM connector pin  
assignments 197  
CD-ROM or DVD problems 244  
change notification 31  
changing computer  
configuration 103, 105  
changing operating systems,  
important information 38  
changing password 42  
chasis types, illustrated 51  
chassis  
creating 35  
AClient 22  
Deployment Solution  
Agent 22  
DiskOnKey 35, 36  
HP Drive Key 35, 36  
USB flash media device 35  
booting options  
asset tracking 38  
ATA/ATAPI (IDE) drive cable pin  
assignments 196  
audible codes 212  
audio problems 233  
Full Boot 205  
Quick Boot 205  
C
cable  
B
CMT hard drive removal and  
replacement 80  
cable connections  
CMT 68  
CMT illustrated 51  
SFF illustrated 52  
USDT illustrated 52  
chassis fan  
backup 28  
Backup and Recovery  
Manager 28  
backwall, SFF removal and  
replacement 155  
battery  
SFF 125  
USDT 170  
cable lock  
SFF removal and  
replacement 146  
cleaning  
CMT removal and  
replacement 100  
disposal 59  
CMT 62  
SFF 110  
USDT 160  
cable lock provision 47  
cable management  
CMT 67  
computer 56  
mouse 57  
safety precautions 56  
clearing password 43  
Client Foundation Suite 27  
Client Management Interface 24  
Client Manager 25  
Client Premium Suite 27  
SFF removal and  
replacement 156  
USDT removal and  
replacement 189  
beep codes 212  
SFF 124  
USDT 169  
258 Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
cloning tools, software 21  
CMT  
rear chassis fan removal and  
replacement 95  
diskette drive  
installing 87  
5.25" drive bezel removal and  
replacement 66  
serial port removal and  
replacement 97  
diskette problems 223  
DiskOnKey  
access panel removal and  
replacement 64  
battery removal and  
replacement 100  
cable connections 68  
cable lock removal and  
replacement 62  
Smart Cover Lock removal and  
replacement 61  
speaker removal and  
replacement 94  
system board connections 68  
system board removal and  
replacement 99  
bootable 35, 36  
HP Drive Key 35  
drive bezel  
CMT removal and  
replacement 66  
drive connectors  
CMT 78  
cable management 67  
chassis, illustrated 51  
disassembly preparation 60  
drive removal and  
tamper-proof screws 61  
computer access panel  
CMT removal and  
Drive Key  
bootable 35, 36  
Drive Key problems 247  
drive, protecting 47  
DriveLock  
replacement 64  
SFF removal and  
replacement 76  
expansion cards removal and  
replacement 72  
replacement 113  
USDT removal and  
applications 44  
using 44  
external security 62  
FailSafe key 61  
fan shroud removal and  
replacement 91  
front bezel removal and  
replacement 65  
front I/O device removal and  
replacement 90  
hard drive cable removal and  
replacement 80  
hard drive removal and  
replacement 80  
heatsink removal and  
replacement 92  
hood sensor removal and  
replacement 63  
inner chassis fan removal and  
replacement 96  
installing optical drive 87  
memory removal and  
replacement 69  
padlock removal and  
replacement 62  
power supply removal and  
replacement 98  
preparation for  
disassembly 60  
processor removal and  
replacement 93  
replacement 163  
drives  
computer cleaning 56  
Computer Setup Utilities 33  
configuring power button 37  
connecting SFF drive cables 127  
connections  
CMT system board 68  
SFF system board 125  
USDT system board 170  
connector pin assignments 191  
controlling access to  
CMT hard drive removal and  
replacement 80  
CMT locations 79  
CMT removal and  
replacement 76  
installing 127  
SFF connecting cables 127  
SFF hard drive removal and  
replacement 138  
SFF locations 126  
SFF removal and  
replacement 126  
transferring hard drive  
screws 176  
computer 38  
country power cord set  
requirements 204  
cover lock 45  
cover lock security, caution 45  
Customer Support 216, 251  
customizing software 21  
USDT removal and  
replacement 170  
dual-state power button 37  
DVI pin assignments 202  
D
deleting password 43  
delimiter characters, table 43  
deployment tools, software 21  
desktop conversion 105  
diagnostic tool for hard drives 47  
diagnostics utility 15  
DIMMs. See memory  
disassembly preparation  
CMT 60  
E
electrostatic discharge (ESD)  
preventing damage 53  
Emergency Recovery Mode, Boot  
Block 32  
entering  
power-on password 41  
setup password 42  
error  
SFF 107  
USDT 159  
messages 206  
ReadyBoost card removal and  
replacement 89  
disk, cloning 21  
Index 259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ethernet  
AUI pin assignments 192  
grounding methods 54  
ProtectTools Security  
Manager 26  
H
BNC pin assignments 191  
RJ-45 pin assignments 192  
expansion cards  
System Software Manager 25  
HPQFlash 32  
hard drive  
CMT removal and  
replacement 80  
I
CMT removal and  
proper handling 58  
SATA characteristics 48  
SFF removal and  
replacement 138  
USDT removal and  
replacement 174  
hard drive cage  
USDT removal and  
replacement 178  
hard drive problems 226  
hard drives, diagnostic tool 47  
hardware installation  
problems 237  
I/O panel  
replacement 72  
SFF removal and  
replacement 120  
USDT removal and  
replacement 183  
industry standards 38  
infrared (IR) transceiver, external,  
pin assignments 195  
initial configuration 21  
inner chassis fan  
CMT removal and  
replacement 96  
Insight Diagnostics 15  
installing  
expansion slot cover  
removing CMT 73  
removing SFF 121  
replacing 74, 123  
F
FailSafe Key  
caution 46  
CMT 61  
ordering 46  
SFF 108  
CMT diskette drive 87  
CMT media card reader 87  
CMT optical drive 87  
CMT removable hard drive 82  
SFF diskette drive 136  
SFF drive cables 127  
SFF guide screws 127  
SFF media card reader 136  
SFF optical drive 131  
SFF removable hard  
drive 140  
headphone pin assignments 194  
heatsink  
fan  
USDT removal and  
replacement 181  
fan shroud  
CMT removal and  
replacement 92  
SFF removal and  
replacement 149  
USDT removal and  
replacement 184  
helpful hints 217  
hood sensor  
CMT removal and  
replacement 91  
SFF removal and  
replacement 145  
fan, power supply 57  
Fault Notification and Recovery  
HP Client Manager 47  
fingerprint identification  
technology 47  
flashing LEDs 212  
front bezel  
CMT removal and  
replacement 65  
SFF removal and  
replacement 114  
USDT removal and  
replacement 164  
front I/O device  
CMT removal and  
replacement 90  
SFF removal and  
replacement 148  
front panel problems 247  
CMT removal and  
replacement 63  
USDT memory module 166,  
HP  
USDT SODIMMs 166, 167  
Intel vPro-branded PCs with Active  
Management Technology 29  
internal temperature of  
computer 47  
Backup and Recovery  
Manager 28  
Client Catalog for SMS 28  
Client Foundation Suite 27  
Client Management  
Interface 24  
Client Manager 25  
Client Premium Suite 27  
Drive Key 35  
HP ProtectTools Security  
Manager 26  
Internet access problems 248  
Internet addresses. See Web sites  
K
keyboard  
cleaning 56  
pin assignments 191  
problems 236  
keyboard delimiter characters,  
national 43  
Lifecycle solutions 21  
OpenView 22  
OpenView Client Configuration  
Manager 27  
L
LEDs  
OpenView PC Configuration  
Management Solution 28  
G
blinking power 212  
blinking PS/2 keyboard 212  
general problems 219  
260 Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
line-in audio pin  
optical drive connector  
USDT removal and  
replacement 173  
optical drive problems 244  
optical drive, USDT  
attaching release latch 171  
ordering FailSafe Key 46  
overheating, prevention 55  
power switch assembly  
SFF removal and  
replacement 147  
power-on password  
changing 42  
assignments 194  
line-out audio pin  
assignments 194  
locking Smart Cover Lock 46  
locks  
deleting 43  
entering 41  
setting 41  
cable lock 160  
HP Business PC Security  
Lock 161  
Preboot Execution Environment  
(PXE) 23  
P
M
padlock  
preinstalled software image 21  
printer problems 235  
Proactive Change Notification  
(PCN) 31  
media card reader  
installing 87  
Media Card Reader  
problems 228  
CMT 62  
SFF 110  
parallel interface pin  
assignments 193  
password  
problems  
memory  
audio 233  
CMT removal and  
replacement 69  
populating sockets 117  
SFF removal and  
replacement 116  
specifications 116  
USDT specifications 166  
memory problems 242  
microphone pin assignments 194  
minitower conversion 103  
monitor  
changing 42  
clearing 43  
deleting 43  
power-on 41  
security 41  
setup 41, 42  
CD-ROM or DVD 244  
diskette 223  
Drive Key 247  
front panel 247  
general 219  
hard drive 226  
hardware installation 237  
Internet access 248  
keyboard 236  
Media Card Reader 228  
memory 242  
monitor 230  
mouse 236  
network 239  
power 222  
printer 235  
processor 244  
PC deployment 21  
PCI card 72, 74, 120, 122  
PCI Express card 72, 74, 120,  
PCI Express Mini Card pin  
assignments 201  
PCI Express pin  
assignments 199  
PCN (Proactive Change  
Notification) 31  
port cover  
pin assignments 195  
problems 230  
mouse  
cleaning 57  
pin assignments 191  
problems 236  
removal and replacement 179  
POST error messages 205  
power button  
configuring 37  
dual-state 37  
power cord set requirements  
country specific 204  
power problems 222  
power supply  
software 250  
processor  
N
national keyboard delimiter  
characters 43  
network problems 239  
notification of changes 31  
numeric error codes 206  
CMT removal and  
replacement 93  
SFF removal and  
replacement 150  
USDT removal and  
replacement 186  
processor problems 244  
protecting hard drive 47  
protecting ROM, caution 31  
PXE (Preboot Execution  
Environment) 23  
O
OpenView Agent 22  
OpenView Client Configuration  
Manager 27  
OpenView PC Configuration  
Management Solution 28  
operating guidelines 55  
operating systems, important  
information about 38  
CMT removal and  
replacement 98  
fan 57  
SFF removal and  
replacement 152  
power supply, surge-tolerant 47  
Index 261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R
CMT system board 99  
SFF backwall 155  
SFF battery 156  
ROM  
flash 31  
Remote Flash 32  
ReadyBoost card  
CMT removal and  
replacement 89  
SFF removal and  
replacement 144  
USDT removal and  
replacement 180  
SFF bezel blanks 115  
SFF chassis fan 146  
SFF computer access  
panel 113  
S
safety and comfort 216  
safety precautions  
cleaning 56  
SFF drives 126  
SATA  
rear chassis fan  
SFF expansion cards 120  
SFF fan shroud 145  
SFF front bezel 114  
SFF front I/O device 148  
SFF hard drive 138  
SFF heatsink 149  
SFF memory 116  
SFF power supply 152  
SFF power switch  
connectors on system  
board 48  
CMT removal and  
replacement 95  
USDT removal and  
replacement 188  
data cable pinouts 49  
hard drive characteristics 48  
pin assignments 199  
power cable pinouts 49  
screws  
transferring to hard drive 176  
screws, correct size 58  
security  
recovery 28  
Recovery Mode, Boot Block  
Emergency 32  
recovery, software 21  
reference designators 252  
release latch  
attaching USDT optical  
drive 171  
Remote ROM Flash 32  
remote setup 23  
Remote System Installation 23  
removable hard drive  
replacing 82  
removal and replacement  
CMT 5.25" drive bezel 66  
CMT access panel 64  
CMT battery 100  
assembly 147  
SFF processor 150  
SFF ReadyBoost card 144  
SFF Smart Cover Lock 108  
SFF speaker 151  
SFF system board 153  
USDT battery 189  
USDT bezel blanks 165  
USDT computer access  
panel 163  
cable lock 47, 160  
CMT 62  
DriveLock 44  
features, table 39  
fingerprint identification  
technology 47  
HP Business PC Security  
HP ProtectTools Security  
Manager 26  
password 41  
settings 38  
SFF 110  
SFF cable lock 110  
SFF padlock 110  
Smart Cover Lock 45  
Smart Cover Sensor 45  
USDT 160  
USDT fan 181  
USDT front bezel 164  
USDT hard drive 174  
USDT hard drive cage 178  
USDT heatsink 184  
USDT I/O panel 183  
USDT optical drive 170  
USDT optical drive  
CMT cable lock 62  
CMT drives 76  
CMT expansion cards 72  
CMT fan shroud 91  
CMT front bezel 65  
CMT front I/O device 90  
CMT hard drive 80  
CMT hard drive cable 80  
CMT heatsink 92  
CMT hood sensor 63  
CMT inner chassis fan 96  
CMT memory 69  
connector 173  
USDT port cover 179  
USDT processor 186  
USDT ReadyBoost card 180  
USDT rear chassis fan 188  
USDT speaker 182  
USDT system board 187  
serial interface pin  
assignments 193  
serial port  
CMT removal and  
replacement 97  
service considerations 57  
setup  
CMT padlock 62  
removing  
CMT power supply 98  
CMT processor 93  
CMT ReadyBoost card 89  
CMT rear chassis fan 95  
CMT serial port 97  
CMT Smart Cover Lock 61  
CMT speaker 94  
expansion slot cover 73  
PCI card 74, 122  
PCI Express card 74, 122  
retired solutions 31  
riser board  
copying to multiple  
computers 34  
copying to single computer 33  
initial 21  
replicating 33  
reference designators 252  
262 Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
setup password  
speaker removal and  
replacement 151  
system board  
Remote System  
Installation 23  
servicing computer 57  
updating and management  
tools 24  
changing 42  
deleting 43  
entering 42  
setting 41  
connections 125  
system board removal and  
replacement 153  
Smart Cover FailSafe Key,  
ordering 46  
Smart Cover Lock  
CMT removal and  
replacement 61  
SFF  
Verdiem Surveyor 23  
spare part number  
tamper-resistent wrench 58  
Torx T-15 screwdriver 57  
speaker  
backwall removal and  
replacement 155  
battery removal and  
replacement 156  
cable connections 125  
cable management 124  
chassis fan removal and  
replacement 146  
chassis, illustrated 52  
computer access panel removal  
and replacement 113  
disassembly preparation 107  
drives removal and  
replacement 126  
expansion card removal and  
replacement 120  
external security 110  
fan shroud removal and  
replacement 145  
CMT removal and  
replacement 94  
SFF removal and  
FailSafe Key 46  
locking 46  
SFF removal and  
replacement 108  
unlocking 46  
replacement 151  
USDT removal and  
replacement 182  
specifications  
CMT memory 69  
SFF memory 116  
USDT SODIMMs 166  
static electricity 53  
Subscriber's Choice 31  
surge-tolerant power supply 47  
system board  
Smart Cover Sensor  
protection levels 45  
setting 45  
SODIMMs  
installing 166  
specifications 166  
software  
Active Management  
Technology 29  
CMT removal and  
front bezel removal and  
replacement 114  
front I/O device removal and  
replacement 148  
guide screws 127  
hard drive removal and  
replacement 138  
heatsink removal and  
replacement 149  
Altiris AClient 22  
Altiris Deployment Solution  
Agent 22  
asset tracking 38  
backing up 19  
Drive Protection System 47  
HP Client Catalog for SMS 28  
HP Client Foundation  
Suite 27  
replacement 99  
reference designators 252  
SATA connectors 48  
SFF removal and  
replacement 153  
USDT removal and  
replacement 187  
system board drive connections  
CMT 78  
memory removal and  
replacement 116  
HP Client Management  
Interface 24  
SFF 129  
System Software Manager 25  
power supply removal and  
replacement 152  
power switch assembly removal  
and replacement 147  
preparation for  
disassembly 107  
processor removal and  
replacement 150  
ReadyBoost card removal and  
replacement 144  
SFF bezel blanks removal and  
replacement 115  
Smart Cover Lock removal and  
replacement 108  
HP Client Manager 25  
HP Client Premium Suite 27  
HP OpenView Agent 22  
HP OpenView Client  
Configuration Manager 27  
HP ProtectTools Security  
Manager 26  
HP System Software  
Manager 25  
integration 21  
T
tamper-proof screws  
CMT 61  
tool 58  
temperature control 55  
temperature, internal  
computer 47  
thermal sensor 47  
tools, servicing 57  
Torx T15 screwdriver 57  
OpenView PC Configuration  
Management Solution 28  
problems 250  
U
unlocking Smart Cover Lock 46  
recovery 21  
Index 263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
URLs (Web sites). See Web sites  
USB flash media device,  
bootable 35, 36  
V
ventilation, proper 55  
Verdiem Surveyor 23  
USB pin assignments 194  
USDT  
W
Wake-on-LAN feature 240  
Web sites  
battery removal and  
replacement 189  
BIOS download 31  
HP Client Foundation  
Suite 27  
bezel blanks removal and  
replacement 165  
cable connections 170  
cable management 169  
chassis, illustrated 52  
computer access panel removal  
and replacement 163  
disassembly preparation 159  
external security 160  
fan removal and  
replacement 181  
front bezel removal and  
replacement 164  
hard drive cage removal and  
replacement 178  
hard drive removal and  
replacement 174  
HP Client Foundation Suite and  
Client Premium Suite 23  
HP Client Manager 26  
HP Client Premium Suite 27  
HP OpenView Client  
Configuration Manager 27  
HP OpenView PC Configuration  
Management Solution 22,  
HP ProtectTools Security  
Manager 26  
HP white papers 30  
HPQFlash 32  
Intel vPro technology 30  
PC deployment 22  
Proactive Change  
heatsink removal and  
replacement 184  
Notification 31  
I/O panel removal and  
replacement 183  
Remote ROM Flash 32  
replicating setup 34  
ROM Flash 32  
software support 38  
Subscriber's Choice 31  
Subscriber’s Choice 31  
System Software Manager  
download 25  
installing memory 166  
optical drive connector removal  
and replacement 173  
optical drive removal and  
replacement 170  
port cover removal and  
replacement 179  
white papers 30  
preparation for  
wrench, tamper-resistant  
CMT 61  
disassembly 159  
processor removal and  
replacement 186  
ReadyBoost card removal and  
replacement 180  
rear chassis fan removal and  
replacement 188  
speaker removal and  
replacement 182  
system board  
connections 170  
system board removal and  
replacement 187  
264 Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Hamilton Beach Air Cleaner 840133100 User Manual
Hamilton Watch Watch 251471 User Manual
Honeywell Security Camera HD40 User Manual
Hotpoint Dishwasher SDAL 1200 User Manual
Hotpoint Oven OS 897D P IX HP User Manual
Hotpoint Washer WML 560 P G A K User Manual
Hunter Fan Humidifier 38257 User Manual
Husky Plumbing Product DBCA4222 User Manual
Icom Car Stereo System IC R100 User Manual
Image Treadmill IMTL39520 User Manual